| Current Path : /usr/share/doc/bind9/arm/ |
FreeBSD hs32.drive.ne.jp 9.1-RELEASE FreeBSD 9.1-RELEASE #1: Wed Jan 14 12:18:08 JST 2015 root@hs32.drive.ne.jp:/sys/amd64/compile/hs32 amd64 |
| Current File : //usr/share/doc/bind9/arm/Bv9ARM.ch06.html |
<!--
- Copyright (C) 2004-2012 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
- Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-
- Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
- purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
- copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-
- THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
- REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
- AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
- INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
- LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
- OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
- PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-->
<!-- $Id$ -->
<html>
<head>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
<title>Chapter 6. BIND 9 Configuration Reference</title>
<meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.71.1">
<link rel="start" href="Bv9ARM.html" title="BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual">
<link rel="up" href="Bv9ARM.html" title="BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual">
<link rel="prev" href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html" title="Chapter 5. The BIND 9 Lightweight Resolver">
<link rel="next" href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html" title="Chapter 7. BIND 9 Security Considerations">
</head>
<body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF">
<div class="navheader">
<table width="100%" summary="Navigation header">
<tr><th colspan="3" align="center">Chapter 6. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Configuration Reference</th></tr>
<tr>
<td width="20%" align="left">
<a accesskey="p" href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html">Prev</a> </td>
<th width="60%" align="center"> </th>
<td width="20%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html">Next</a>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
<hr>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
<a name="Bv9ARM.ch06"></a>Chapter 6. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Configuration Reference</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#configuration_file_elements">Configuration File Elements</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#address_match_lists">Address Match Lists</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2574332">Comment Syntax</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#Configuration_File_Grammar">Configuration File Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2574986"><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#acl"><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575176"><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#controls_statement_definition_and_usage"><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575467"><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575484"><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575576"><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575600"><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575758"><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2575884"><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2577910"><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2577984"><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2578116"><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2578160"><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2578174"><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#options"><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_grammar"><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage"><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statschannels"><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2589481"><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#trusted-keys"><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2589689"><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Definition
and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2589736"><span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#managed-keys"><span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> Statement Definition
and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#view_statement_grammar"><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2590162"><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_statement_grammar"><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
Statement Grammar</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2591713"><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2595116">Zone File</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them">Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2597415">Discussion of MX Records</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#Setting_TTLs">Setting TTLs</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2597962">Inverse Mapping in IPv4</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2598157">Other Zone File Directives</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#id2598430"><acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> Master File Extension: the <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> Directive</a></span></dt>
<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zonefile_format">Additional File Formats</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statistics">BIND9 Statistics</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statistics_counters">Statistics Counters</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
<p>
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 configuration is broadly similar
to <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8; however, there are a few new
areas
of configuration, such as views. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
8 configuration files should work with few alterations in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
9, although more complex configurations should be reviewed to check
if they can be more efficiently implemented using the new features
found in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
<p>
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4 configuration files can be
converted to the new format
using the shell script
<code class="filename">contrib/named-bootconf/named-bootconf.sh</code>.
</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="configuration_file_elements"></a>Configuration File Elements</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
Following is a list of elements used throughout the <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> configuration
file documentation:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">acl_name</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The name of an <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> as
defined by the <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> statement.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">address_match_list</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A list of one or more
<code class="varname">ip_addr</code>,
<code class="varname">ip_prefix</code>, <code class="varname">key_id</code>,
or <code class="varname">acl_name</code> elements, see
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#address_match_lists" title="Address Match Lists">the section called “Address Match Lists”</a>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">masters_list</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A named list of one or more <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
with optional <code class="varname">key_id</code> and/or
<code class="varname">ip_port</code>.
A <code class="varname">masters_list</code> may include other
<code class="varname">masters_lists</code>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">domain_name</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A quoted string which will be used as
a DNS name, for example "<code class="literal">my.test.domain</code>".
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">namelist</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A list of one or more <code class="varname">domain_name</code>
elements.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">dotted_decimal</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
One to four integers valued 0 through
255 separated by dots (`.'), such as <span><strong class="command">123</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">45.67</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">89.123.45.67</strong></span>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ip4_addr</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An IPv4 address with exactly four elements
in <code class="varname">dotted_decimal</code> notation.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ip6_addr</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An IPv6 address, such as <span><strong class="command">2001:db8::1234</strong></span>.
IPv6 scoped addresses that have ambiguity on their
scope zones must be disambiguated by an appropriate
zone ID with the percent character (`%') as
delimiter. It is strongly recommended to use
string zone names rather than numeric identifiers,
in order to be robust against system configuration
changes. However, since there is no standard
mapping for such names and identifier values,
currently only interface names as link identifiers
are supported, assuming one-to-one mapping between
interfaces and links. For example, a link-local
address <span><strong class="command">fe80::1</strong></span> on the link
attached to the interface <span><strong class="command">ne0</strong></span>
can be specified as <span><strong class="command">fe80::1%ne0</strong></span>.
Note that on most systems link-local addresses
always have the ambiguity, and need to be
disambiguated.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An <code class="varname">ip4_addr</code> or <code class="varname">ip6_addr</code>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ip_port</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An IP port <code class="varname">number</code>.
The <code class="varname">number</code> is limited to 0
through 65535, with values
below 1024 typically restricted to use by processes running
as root.
In some cases, an asterisk (`*') character can be used as a
placeholder to
select a random high-numbered port.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ip_prefix</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An IP network specified as an <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>,
followed by a slash (`/') and then the number of bits in the
netmask.
Trailing zeros in a <code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
may omitted.
For example, <span><strong class="command">127/8</strong></span> is the
network <span><strong class="command">127.0.0.0</strong></span> with
netmask <span><strong class="command">255.0.0.0</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">1.2.3.0/28</strong></span> is
network <span><strong class="command">1.2.3.0</strong></span> with netmask <span><strong class="command">255.255.255.240</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
When specifying a prefix involving a IPv6 scoped address
the scope may be omitted. In that case the prefix will
match packets from any scope.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">key_id</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A <code class="varname">domain_name</code> representing
the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction
security.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">key_list</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A list of one or more
<code class="varname">key_id</code>s,
separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">number</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A non-negative 32-bit integer
(i.e., a number between 0 and 4294967295, inclusive).
Its acceptable value might further
be limited by the context in which it is used.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">path_name</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A quoted string which will be used as
a pathname, such as <code class="filename">zones/master/my.test.domain</code>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">port_list</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A list of an <code class="varname">ip_port</code> or a port
range.
A port range is specified in the form of
<strong class="userinput"><code>range</code></strong> followed by
two <code class="varname">ip_port</code>s,
<code class="varname">port_low</code> and
<code class="varname">port_high</code>, which represents
port numbers from <code class="varname">port_low</code> through
<code class="varname">port_high</code>, inclusive.
<code class="varname">port_low</code> must not be larger than
<code class="varname">port_high</code>.
For example,
<strong class="userinput"><code>range 1024 65535</code></strong> represents
ports from 1024 through 65535.
In either case an asterisk (`*') character is not
allowed as a valid <code class="varname">ip_port</code>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">size_spec</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A number, the word <strong class="userinput"><code>unlimited</code></strong>,
or the word <strong class="userinput"><code>default</code></strong>.
</p>
<p>
An <code class="varname">unlimited</code> <code class="varname">size_spec</code> requests unlimited
use, or the maximum available amount. A <code class="varname">default size_spec</code> uses
the limit that was in force when the server was started.
</p>
<p>
A <code class="varname">number</code> can optionally be
followed by a scaling factor:
<strong class="userinput"><code>K</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>k</code></strong>
for kilobytes,
<strong class="userinput"><code>M</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>m</code></strong>
for megabytes, and
<strong class="userinput"><code>G</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>g</code></strong> for gigabytes,
which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024*1024*1024
respectively.
</p>
<p>
The value must be representable as a 64-bit unsigned integer
(0 to 18446744073709551615, inclusive).
Using <code class="varname">unlimited</code> is the best
way
to safely set a really large number.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">yes_or_no</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Either <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> or <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
The words <strong class="userinput"><code>true</code></strong> and <strong class="userinput"><code>false</code></strong> are
also accepted, as are the numbers <strong class="userinput"><code>1</code></strong>
and <strong class="userinput"><code>0</code></strong>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">dialup_option</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
One of <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>,
<strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, <strong class="userinput"><code>notify</code></strong>,
<strong class="userinput"><code>notify-passive</code></strong>, <strong class="userinput"><code>refresh</code></strong> or
<strong class="userinput"><code>passive</code></strong>.
When used in a zone, <strong class="userinput"><code>notify-passive</code></strong>,
<strong class="userinput"><code>refresh</code></strong>, and <strong class="userinput"><code>passive</code></strong>
are restricted to slave and stub zones.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="address_match_lists"></a>Address Match Lists</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2574099"></a>Syntax</h4></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><code class="varname">address_match_list</code> = address_match_list_element ;
[<span class="optional"> address_match_list_element; ... </span>]
<code class="varname">address_match_list_element</code> = [<span class="optional"> ! </span>] (ip_address [<span class="optional">/length</span>] |
key key_id | acl_name | { address_match_list } )
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2574126"></a>Definition and Usage</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Address match lists are primarily used to determine access
control for various server operations. They are also used in
the <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span>
statements. The elements which constitute an address match
list can be any of the following:
</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)</li>
<li>an IP prefix (in `/' notation)</li>
<li>
a key ID, as defined by the <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span>
statement
</li>
<li>the name of an address match list defined with
the <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> statement
</li>
<li>a nested address match list enclosed in braces</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`!'),
and the match list names "any", "none", "localhost", and
"localnets" are predefined. More information on those names
can be found in the description of the acl statement.
</p>
<p>
The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic
element something of a misnomer, since security keys can be used
to validate access without regard to a host or network address.
Nonetheless, the term "address match list" is still used
throughout the documentation.
</p>
<p>
When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address
match list, the comparison takes place in approximately O(1)
time. However, key comparisons require that the list of keys
be traversed until a matching key is found, and therefore may
be somewhat slower.
</p>
<p>
The interpretation of a match depends on whether the list is being
used for access control, defining <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> ports, or in a
<span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span>, and whether the element was negated.
</p>
<p>
When used as an access control list, a non-negated match
allows access and a negated match denies access. If
there is no match, access is denied. The clauses
<span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-recursion-on</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache-on</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span>, and
<span><strong class="command">blackhole</strong></span> all use address match
lists. Similarly, the <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> option will cause the
server to refuse queries on any of the machine's
addresses which do not match the list.
</p>
<p>
Order of insertion is significant. If more than one element
in an ACL is found to match a given IP address or prefix,
preference will be given to the one that came
<span class="emphasis"><em>first</em></span> in the ACL definition.
Because of this first-match behavior, an element that
defines a subset of another element in the list should
come before the broader element, regardless of whether
either is negated. For example, in
<span><strong class="command">1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13;</strong></span>
the 1.2.3.13 element is completely useless because the
algorithm will match any lookup for 1.2.3.13 to the 1.2.3/24
element. Using <span><strong class="command">! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24</strong></span> fixes
that problem by having 1.2.3.13 blocked by the negation, but
all other 1.2.3.* hosts fall through.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2574332"></a>Comment Syntax</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 comment syntax allows for
comments to appear
anywhere that whitespace may appear in a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> configuration
file. To appeal to programmers of all kinds, they can be written
in the C, C++, or shell/perl style.
</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2574347"></a>Syntax</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">/* This is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> comment as in C */</pre>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">// This is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> comment as in C++</pre>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"># This is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> comment as in common UNIX shells
# and perl</pre>
<p>
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2574377"></a>Definition and Usage</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Comments may appear anywhere that whitespace may appear in
a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> configuration file.
</p>
<p>
C-style comments start with the two characters /* (slash,
star) and end with */ (star, slash). Because they are completely
delimited with these characters, they can be used to comment only
a portion of a line or to span multiple lines.
</p>
<p>
C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following
is not valid because the entire comment ends with the first */:
</p>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">/* This is the start of a comment.
This is still part of the comment.
/* This is an incorrect attempt at nesting a comment. */
This is no longer in any comment. */
</pre>
<p>
</p>
<p>
C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash,
slash) and continue to the end of the physical line. They cannot
be continued across multiple physical lines; to have one logical
comment span multiple lines, each line must use the // pair.
For example:
</p>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">// This is the start of a comment. The next line
// is a new comment, even though it is logically
// part of the previous comment.
</pre>
<p>
</p>
<p>
Shell-style (or perl-style, if you prefer) comments start
with the character <code class="literal">#</code> (number sign)
and continue to the end of the
physical line, as in C++ comments.
For example:
</p>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"># This is the start of a comment. The next line
# is a new comment, even though it is logically
# part of the previous comment.
</pre>
<p>
</p>
<div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Warning</h3>
<p>
You cannot use the semicolon (`;') character
to start a comment such as you would in a zone file. The
semicolon indicates the end of a configuration
statement.
</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="Configuration_File_Grammar"></a>Configuration File Grammar</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
A <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 configuration consists of
statements and comments.
Statements end with a semicolon. Statements and comments are the
only elements that can appear without enclosing braces. Many
statements contain a block of sub-statements, which are also
terminated with a semicolon.
</p>
<p>
The following statements are supported:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
defines a named IP address
matching list, for access control and other uses.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
declares control channels to be used
by the <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> utility.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
includes a file.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
specifies key information for use in
authentication and authorization using TSIG.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
specifies what the server logs, and where
the log messages are sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
configures <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to
also act as a light-weight resolver daemon (<span><strong class="command">lwresd</strong></span>).
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
defines a named masters list for
inclusion in stub and slave zone masters clauses.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
controls global server configuration
options and sets defaults for other statements.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
sets certain configuration options on
a per-server basis.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
declares communication channels to get access to
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> statistics.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
defines trusted DNSSEC keys.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
lists DNSSEC keys to be kept up to date
using RFC 5011 trust anchor maintenance.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
defines a view.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
defines a zone.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statements may only occur once
per
configuration.
</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2574986"></a><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> acl-name {
address_match_list
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="acl"></a><span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> statement assigns a symbolic
name to an address match list. It gets its name from a primary
use of address match lists: Access Control Lists (ACLs).
</p>
<p>
Note that an address match list's name must be defined
with <span><strong class="command">acl</strong></span> before it can be used
elsewhere; no forward references are allowed.
</p>
<p>
The following ACLs are built-in:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">any</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Matches all hosts.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">none</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Matches no hosts.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">localhost</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network
interfaces on the system.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">localnets</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network
for which the system has an interface.
Some systems do not provide a way to determine the prefix
lengths of
local IPv6 addresses.
In such a case, <span><strong class="command">localnets</strong></span>
only matches the local
IPv6 addresses, just like <span><strong class="command">localhost</strong></span>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575176"></a><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> {
[ inet ( ip_addr | * ) [ port ip_port ]
allow { <em class="replaceable"><code> address_match_list </code></em> }
keys { <em class="replaceable"><code>key_list</code></em> }; ]
[ inet ...; ]
[ unix <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> perm <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> owner <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> group <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>
keys { <em class="replaceable"><code>key_list</code></em> }; ]
[ unix ...; ]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"></a><span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement declares control
channels to be used by system administrators to control the
operation of the name server. These control channels are
used by the <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> utility to send
commands to and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.
</p>
<p>
An <span><strong class="command">inet</strong></span> control channel is a TCP socket
listening at the specified <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span> on the
specified <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span>, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address. An <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">*</code> (asterisk) is
interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard address; connections will be
accepted on any of the system's IPv4 addresses.
To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
use an <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">::</code>.
If you will only use <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> on the local host,
using the loopback address (<code class="literal">127.0.0.1</code>
or <code class="literal">::1</code>) is recommended for maximum security.
</p>
<p>
If no port is specified, port 953 is used. The asterisk
"<code class="literal">*</code>" cannot be used for <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
The ability to issue commands over the control channel is
restricted by the <span><strong class="command">allow</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clauses.
Connections to the control channel are permitted based on the
<span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>. This is for simple
IP address based filtering only; any <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span>
elements of the <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>
are ignored.
</p>
<p>
A <span><strong class="command">unix</strong></span> control channel is a UNIX domain
socket listening at the specified path in the file system.
Access to the socket is specified by the <span><strong class="command">perm</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">owner</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">group</strong></span> clauses.
Note on some platforms (SunOS and Solaris) the permissions
(<span><strong class="command">perm</strong></span>) are applied to the parent directory
as the permissions on the socket itself are ignored.
</p>
<p>
The primary authorization mechanism of the command
channel is the <span><strong class="command">key_list</strong></span>, which
contains a list of <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span>s.
Each <span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span> in the <span><strong class="command">key_list</strong></span>
is authorized to execute commands over the control channel.
See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch03.html#rndc">Remote Name Daemon Control application</a> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch03.html#admin_tools" title="Administrative Tools">the section called “Administrative Tools”</a>)
for information about configuring keys in <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
If no <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement is present,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will set up a default
control channel listening on the loopback address 127.0.0.1
and its IPv6 counterpart ::1.
In this case, and also when the <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement
is present but does not have a <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clause,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will attempt to load the command channel key
from the file <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> in
<code class="filename">/etc</code> (or whatever <code class="varname">sysconfdir</code>
was specified as when <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> was built).
To create a <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file, run
<strong class="userinput"><code>rndc-confgen -a</code></strong>.
</p>
<p>
The <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> feature was created to
ease the transition of systems from <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8,
which did not have digital signatures on its command channel
messages and thus did not have a <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clause.
It makes it possible to use an existing <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8
configuration file in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 unchanged,
and still have <span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> work the same way
<span><strong class="command">ndc</strong></span> worked in BIND 8, simply by executing the
command <strong class="userinput"><code>rndc-confgen -a</code></strong> after BIND 9 is
installed.
</p>
<p>
Since the <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> feature
is only intended to allow the backward-compatible usage of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 configuration files, this
feature does not
have a high degree of configurability. You cannot easily change
the key name or the size of the secret, so you should make a
<code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> with your own key if you
wish to change
those things. The <code class="filename">rndc.key</code> file
also has its
permissions set such that only the owner of the file (the user that
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is running as) can access it.
If you
desire greater flexibility in allowing other users to access
<span><strong class="command">rndc</strong></span> commands, then you need to create
a
<code class="filename">rndc.conf</code> file and make it group
readable by a group
that contains the users who should have access.
</p>
<p>
To disable the command channel, use an empty
<span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement:
<span><strong class="command">controls { };</strong></span>.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575467"></a><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>;</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575484"></a><span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">include</strong></span> statement inserts the
specified file at the point where the <span><strong class="command">include</strong></span>
statement is encountered. The <span><strong class="command">include</strong></span>
statement facilitates the administration of configuration
files
by permitting the reading or writing of some things but not
others. For example, the statement could include private keys
that are readable only by the name server.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575576"></a><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>key_id</code></em> {
algorithm <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em>;
secret <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em>;
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575600"></a><span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> statement defines a shared
secret key for use with TSIG (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#tsig" title="TSIG">the section called “TSIG”</a>)
or the command channel
(see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#controls_statement_definition_and_usage" title="controls Statement Definition and
Usage">the section called “<span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage”</a>).
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> statement can occur at the
top level
of the configuration file or inside a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
statement. Keys defined in top-level <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span>
statements can be used in all views. Keys intended for use in
a <span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> statement
(see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#controls_statement_definition_and_usage" title="controls Statement Definition and
Usage">the section called “<span><strong class="command">controls</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage”</a>)
must be defined at the top level.
</p>
<p>
The <em class="replaceable"><code>key_id</code></em>, also known as the
key name, is a domain name uniquely identifying the key. It can
be used in a <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span>
statement to cause requests sent to that
server to be signed with this key, or in address match lists to
verify that incoming requests have been signed with a key
matching this name, algorithm, and secret.
</p>
<p>
The <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm_id</code></em> is a string
that specifies a security/authentication algorithm. Named
supports <code class="literal">hmac-md5</code>,
<code class="literal">hmac-sha1</code>, <code class="literal">hmac-sha224</code>,
<code class="literal">hmac-sha256</code>, <code class="literal">hmac-sha384</code>
and <code class="literal">hmac-sha512</code> TSIG authentication.
Truncated hashes are supported by appending the minimum
number of required bits preceded by a dash, e.g.
<code class="literal">hmac-sha1-80</code>. The
<em class="replaceable"><code>secret_string</code></em> is the secret
to be used by the algorithm, and is treated as a base-64
encoded string.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575758"></a><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> {
[ <span><strong class="command">channel</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>channel_name</code></em> {
( <span><strong class="command">file</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>
[ <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> ( <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> | <span><strong class="command">unlimited</strong></span> ) ]
[ <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>size spec</code></em> ]
| <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>syslog_facility</code></em>
| <span><strong class="command">stderr</strong></span>
| <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> );
[ <span><strong class="command">severity</strong></span> (<code class="option">critical</code> | <code class="option">error</code> | <code class="option">warning</code> | <code class="option">notice</code> |
<code class="option">info</code> | <code class="option">debug</code> [ <em class="replaceable"><code>level</code></em> ] | <code class="option">dynamic</code> ); ]
[ <span><strong class="command">print-category</strong></span> <code class="option">yes</code> or <code class="option">no</code>; ]
[ <span><strong class="command">print-severity</strong></span> <code class="option">yes</code> or <code class="option">no</code>; ]
[ <span><strong class="command">print-time</strong></span> <code class="option">yes</code> or <code class="option">no</code>; ]
}; ]
[ <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>category_name</code></em> {
<em class="replaceable"><code>channel_name</code></em> ; [ <em class="replaceable"><code>channel_name</code></em> ; ... ]
}; ]
...
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2575884"></a><span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> statement configures a
wide
variety of logging options for the name server. Its <span><strong class="command">channel</strong></span> phrase
associates output methods, format options and severity levels with
a name that can then be used with the <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> phrase
to select how various classes of messages are logged.
</p>
<p>
Only one <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> statement is used to
define
as many channels and categories as are wanted. If there is no <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span> statement,
the logging configuration will be:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">logging {
category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
category unmatched { null; };
};
</pre>
<p>
In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, the logging configuration
is only established when
the entire configuration file has been parsed. In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, it was
established as soon as the <span><strong class="command">logging</strong></span>
statement
was parsed. When the server is starting up, all logging messages
regarding syntax errors in the configuration file go to the default
channels, or to standard error if the "<code class="option">-g</code>" option
was specified.
</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2576005"></a>The <span><strong class="command">channel</strong></span> Phrase</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
All log output goes to one or more <span class="emphasis"><em>channels</em></span>;
you can make as many of them as you want.
</p>
<p>
Every channel definition must include a destination clause that
says whether messages selected for the channel go to a file, to a
particular syslog facility, to the standard error stream, or are
discarded. It can optionally also limit the message severity level
that will be accepted by the channel (the default is
<span><strong class="command">info</strong></span>), and whether to include a
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>-generated time stamp, the
category name
and/or severity level (the default is not to include any).
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> destination clause
causes all messages sent to the channel to be discarded;
in that case, other options for the channel are meaningless.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">file</strong></span> destination clause directs
the channel
to a disk file. It can include limitations
both on how large the file is allowed to become, and how many
versions
of the file will be saved each time the file is opened.
</p>
<p>
If you use the <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> log file
option, then
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will retain that many backup
versions of the file by
renaming them when opening. For example, if you choose to keep
three old versions
of the file <code class="filename">lamers.log</code>, then just
before it is opened
<code class="filename">lamers.log.1</code> is renamed to
<code class="filename">lamers.log.2</code>, <code class="filename">lamers.log.0</code> is renamed
to <code class="filename">lamers.log.1</code>, and <code class="filename">lamers.log</code> is
renamed to <code class="filename">lamers.log.0</code>.
You can say <span><strong class="command">versions unlimited</strong></span> to
not limit
the number of versions.
If a <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> option is associated with
the log file,
then renaming is only done when the file being opened exceeds the
indicated size. No backup versions are kept by default; any
existing
log file is simply appended.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> option for files is used
to limit log
growth. If the file ever exceeds the size, then <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will
stop writing to the file unless it has a <span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> option
associated with it. If backup versions are kept, the files are
rolled as
described above and a new one begun. If there is no
<span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> option, no more data will
be written to the log
until some out-of-band mechanism removes or truncates the log to
less than the
maximum size. The default behavior is not to limit the size of
the
file.
</p>
<p>
Example usage of the <span><strong class="command">size</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">versions</strong></span> options:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel an_example_channel {
file "example.log" versions 3 size 20m;
print-time yes;
print-category yes;
};
</pre>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> destination clause
directs the
channel to the system log. Its argument is a
syslog facility as described in the <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> man
page. Known facilities are <span><strong class="command">kern</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">user</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">mail</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">daemon</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">auth</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">lpr</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">news</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">uucp</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">cron</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">authpriv</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">ftp</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local0</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local1</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">local2</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local3</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local4</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">local5</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">local6</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">local7</strong></span>, however not all facilities
are supported on
all operating systems.
How <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> will handle messages
sent to
this facility is described in the <span><strong class="command">syslog.conf</strong></span> man
page. If you have a system which uses a very old version of <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> that
only uses two arguments to the <span><strong class="command">openlog()</strong></span> function,
then this clause is silently ignored.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">severity</strong></span> clause works like <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>'s
"priorities", except that they can also be used if you are writing
straight to a file rather than using <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>.
Messages which are not at least of the severity level given will
not be selected for the channel; messages of higher severity
levels
will be accepted.
</p>
<p>
If you are using <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span>, then the <span><strong class="command">syslog.conf</strong></span> priorities
will also determine what eventually passes through. For example,
defining a channel facility and severity as <span><strong class="command">daemon</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">debug</strong></span> but
only logging <span><strong class="command">daemon.warning</strong></span> via <span><strong class="command">syslog.conf</strong></span> will
cause messages of severity <span><strong class="command">info</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">notice</strong></span> to
be dropped. If the situation were reversed, with <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> writing
messages of only <span><strong class="command">warning</strong></span> or higher,
then <span><strong class="command">syslogd</strong></span> would
print all messages it received from the channel.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">stderr</strong></span> destination clause
directs the
channel to the server's standard error stream. This is intended
for
use when the server is running as a foreground process, for
example
when debugging a configuration.
</p>
<p>
The server can supply extensive debugging information when
it is in debugging mode. If the server's global debug level is
greater
than zero, then debugging mode will be active. The global debug
level is set either by starting the <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> server
with the <code class="option">-d</code> flag followed by a positive integer,
or by running <span><strong class="command">rndc trace</strong></span>.
The global debug level
can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running <span><strong class="command">rndc
notrace</strong></span>. All debugging messages in the server have a debug
level, and higher debug levels give more detailed output. Channels
that specify a specific debug severity, for example:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel specific_debug_level {
file "foo";
severity debug 3;
};
</pre>
<p>
will get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the
server is in debugging mode, regardless of the global debugging
level. Channels with <span><strong class="command">dynamic</strong></span>
severity use the
server's global debug level to determine what messages to print.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">print-time</strong></span> has been turned on,
then
the date and time will be logged. <span><strong class="command">print-time</strong></span> may
be specified for a <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> channel,
but is usually
pointless since <span><strong class="command">syslog</strong></span> also logs
the date and
time. If <span><strong class="command">print-category</strong></span> is
requested, then the
category of the message will be logged as well. Finally, if <span><strong class="command">print-severity</strong></span> is
on, then the severity level of the message will be logged. The <span><strong class="command">print-</strong></span> options may
be used in any combination, and will always be printed in the
following
order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all
three <span><strong class="command">print-</strong></span> options
are on:
</p>
<p>
<code class="computeroutput">28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running</code>
</p>
<p>
There are four predefined channels that are used for
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>'s default logging as follows.
How they are
used is described in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#the_category_phrase" title="The category Phrase">the section called “The <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> Phrase”</a>.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel default_syslog {
// send to syslog's daemon facility
syslog daemon;
// only send priority info and higher
severity info;
channel default_debug {
// write to named.run in the working directory
// Note: stderr is used instead of "named.run" if
// the server is started with the '-f' option.
file "named.run";
// log at the server's current debug level
severity dynamic;
};
channel default_stderr {
// writes to stderr
stderr;
// only send priority info and higher
severity info;
};
channel null {
// toss anything sent to this channel
null;
};
</pre>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">default_debug</strong></span> channel has the
special
property that it only produces output when the server's debug
level is
nonzero. It normally writes to a file called <code class="filename">named.run</code>
in the server's working directory.
</p>
<p>
For security reasons, when the "<code class="option">-u</code>"
command line option is used, the <code class="filename">named.run</code> file
is created only after <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> has
changed to the
new UID, and any debug output generated while <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is
starting up and still running as root is discarded. If you need
to capture this output, you must run the server with the "<code class="option">-g</code>"
option and redirect standard error to a file.
</p>
<p>
Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. Thus you
cannot alter the built-in channels directly, but you can modify
the default logging by pointing categories at channels you have
defined.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="the_category_phrase"></a>The <span><strong class="command">category</strong></span> Phrase</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
There are many categories, so you can send the logs you want
to see wherever you want, without seeing logs you don't want. If
you don't specify a list of channels for a category, then log
messages
in that category will be sent to the <span><strong class="command">default</strong></span> category
instead. If you don't specify a default category, the following
"default default" is used:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
</pre>
<p>
As an example, let's say you want to log security events to
a file, but you also want keep the default logging behavior. You'd
specify the following:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">channel my_security_channel {
file "my_security_file";
severity info;
};
category security {
my_security_channel;
default_syslog;
default_debug;
};</pre>
<p>
To discard all messages in a category, specify the <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> channel:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">category xfer-out { null; };
category notify { null; };
</pre>
<p>
Following are the available categories and brief descriptions
of the types of log information they contain. More
categories may be added in future <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> releases.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">default</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The default category defines the logging
options for those categories where no specific
configuration has been
defined.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">general</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The catch-all. Many things still aren't
classified into categories, and they all end up here.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">database</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Messages relating to the databases used
internally by the name server to store zone and cache
data.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">security</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Approval and denial of requests.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">config</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Configuration file parsing and processing.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">resolver</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
DNS resolution, such as the recursive
lookups performed on behalf of clients by a caching name
server.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">xfer-in</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Zone transfers the server is receiving.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">xfer-out</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Zone transfers the server is sending.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The NOTIFY protocol.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">client</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Processing of client requests.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">unmatched</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Messages that <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> was unable to determine the
class of or for which there was no matching <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>.
A one line summary is also logged to the <span><strong class="command">client</strong></span> category.
This category is best sent to a file or stderr, by
default it is sent to
the <span><strong class="command">null</strong></span> channel.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">network</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Network operations.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">update</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dynamic updates.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">update-security</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Approval and denial of update requests.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">queries</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Specify where queries should be logged to.
</p>
<p>
At startup, specifying the category <span><strong class="command">queries</strong></span> will also
enable query logging unless <span><strong class="command">querylog</strong></span> option has been
specified.
</p>
<p>
The query log entry reports the client's IP
address and port number, and the query name,
class and type. Next it reports whether the
Recursion Desired flag was set (+ if set, -
if not set), if the query was signed (S),
EDNS was in use (E), if TCP was used (T), if
DO (DNSSEC Ok) was set (D), or if CD (Checking
Disabled) was set (C). After this the
destination address the query was sent to is
reported.
</p>
<p>
<code class="computeroutput">client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE</code>
</p>
<p>
<code class="computeroutput">client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">query-errors</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Information about queries that resulted in some
failure.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">dispatch</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dispatching of incoming packets to the
server modules where they are to be processed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">dnssec</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
DNSSEC and TSIG protocol processing.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">lame-servers</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Lame servers. These are misconfigurations
in remote servers, discovered by BIND 9 when trying to
query those servers during resolution.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">delegation-only</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Delegation only. Logs queries that have been
forced to NXDOMAIN as the result of a
delegation-only zone or a
<span><strong class="command">delegation-only</strong></span> in a hint
or stub zone declaration.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">edns-disabled</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Log queries that have been forced to use plain
DNS due to timeouts. This is often due to
the remote servers not being RFC 1034 compliant
(not always returning FORMERR or similar to
EDNS queries and other extensions to the DNS
when they are not understood). In other words, this is
targeted at servers that fail to respond to
DNS queries that they don't understand.
</p>
<p>
Note: the log message can also be due to
packet loss. Before reporting servers for
non-RFC 1034 compliance they should be re-tested
to determine the nature of the non-compliance.
This testing should prevent or reduce the
number of false-positive reports.
</p>
<p>
Note: eventually <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will have to stop
treating such timeouts as due to RFC 1034 non
compliance and start treating it as plain
packet loss. Falsely classifying packet
loss as due to RFC 1034 non compliance impacts
on DNSSEC validation which requires EDNS for
the DNSSEC records to be returned.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RPZ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Information about errors in response policy zone files,
rewritten responses, and at the highest
<span><strong class="command">debug</strong></span> levels, mere rewriting
attempts.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2577322"></a>The <span><strong class="command">query-errors</strong></span> Category</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">query-errors</strong></span> category is
specifically intended for debugging purposes: To identify
why and how specific queries result in responses which
indicate an error.
Messages of this category are therefore only logged
with <span><strong class="command">debug</strong></span> levels.
</p>
<p>
At the debug levels of 1 or higher, each response with the
rcode of SERVFAIL is logged as follows:
</p>
<p>
<code class="computeroutput">client 127.0.0.1#61502: query failed (SERVFAIL) for www.example.com/IN/AAAA at query.c:3880</code>
</p>
<p>
This means an error resulting in SERVFAIL was
detected at line 3880 of source file
<code class="filename">query.c</code>.
Log messages of this level will particularly
help identify the cause of SERVFAIL for an
authoritative server.
</p>
<p>
At the debug levels of 2 or higher, detailed context
information of recursive resolutions that resulted in
SERVFAIL is logged.
The log message will look like as follows:
</p>
<p>
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
fetch completed at resolver.c:2970 for www.example.com/A
in 30.000183: timed out/success [domain:example.com,
referral:2,restart:7,qrysent:8,timeout:5,lame:0,neterr:0,
badresp:1,adberr:0,findfail:0,valfail:0]
</pre>
<p>
</p>
<p>
The first part before the colon shows that a recursive
resolution for AAAA records of www.example.com completed
in 30.000183 seconds and the final result that led to the
SERVFAIL was determined at line 2970 of source file
<code class="filename">resolver.c</code>.
</p>
<p>
The following part shows the detected final result and the
latest result of DNSSEC validation.
The latter is always success when no validation attempt
is made.
In this example, this query resulted in SERVFAIL probably
because all name servers are down or unreachable, leading
to a timeout in 30 seconds.
DNSSEC validation was probably not attempted.
</p>
<p>
The last part enclosed in square brackets shows statistics
information collected for this particular resolution
attempt.
The <code class="varname">domain</code> field shows the deepest zone
that the resolver reached;
it is the zone where the error was finally detected.
The meaning of the other fields is summarized in the
following table.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">referral</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of referrals the resolver received
throughout the resolution process.
In the above example this is 2, which are most
likely com and example.com.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">restart</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of cycles that the resolver tried
remote servers at the <code class="varname">domain</code>
zone.
In each cycle the resolver sends one query
(possibly resending it, depending on the response)
to each known name server of
the <code class="varname">domain</code> zone.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">qrysent</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of queries the resolver sent at the
<code class="varname">domain</code> zone.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">timeout</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of timeouts since the resolver
received the last response.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">lame</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of lame servers the resolver detected
at the <code class="varname">domain</code> zone.
A server is detected to be lame either by an
invalid response or as a result of lookup in
BIND9's address database (ADB), where lame
servers are cached.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">neterr</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of erroneous results that the
resolver encountered in sending queries
at the <code class="varname">domain</code> zone.
One common case is the remote server is
unreachable and the resolver receives an ICMP
unreachable error message.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">badresp</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of unexpected responses (other than
<code class="varname">lame</code>) to queries sent by the
resolver at the <code class="varname">domain</code> zone.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">adberr</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures in finding remote server addresses
of the <code class="varname">domain</code> zone in the ADB.
One common case of this is that the remote
server's name does not have any address records.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">findfail</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures of resolving remote server addresses.
This is a total number of failures throughout
the resolution process.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><code class="varname">valfail</code></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures of DNSSEC validation.
Validation failures are counted throughout
the resolution process (not limited to
the <code class="varname">domain</code> zone), but should
only happen in <code class="varname">domain</code>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
At the debug levels of 3 or higher, the same messages
as those at the debug 1 level are logged for other errors
than SERVFAIL.
Note that negative responses such as NXDOMAIN are not
regarded as errors here.
</p>
<p>
At the debug levels of 4 or higher, the same messages
as those at the debug 2 level are logged for other errors
than SERVFAIL.
Unlike the above case of level 3, messages are logged for
negative responses.
This is because any unexpected results can be difficult to
debug in the recursion case.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2577910"></a><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
This is the grammar of the <span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span>
statement in the <code class="filename">named.conf</code> file:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> {
[<span class="optional"> listen-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> view <em class="replaceable"><code>view_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> search { <em class="replaceable"><code>domain_name</code></em> ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>domain_name</code></em> ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ndots <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2577984"></a><span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> statement configures the
name
server to also act as a lightweight resolver server. (See
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html#lwresd" title="Running a Resolver Daemon">the section called “Running a Resolver Daemon”</a>.) There may be multiple
<span><strong class="command">lwres</strong></span> statements configuring
lightweight resolver servers with different properties.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> statement specifies a
list of
addresses (and ports) that this instance of a lightweight resolver
daemon
should accept requests on. If no port is specified, port 921 is
used.
If this statement is omitted, requests will be accepted on
127.0.0.1,
port 921.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement binds this
instance of a
lightweight resolver daemon to a view in the DNS namespace, so that
the
response will be constructed in the same manner as a normal DNS
query
matching this view. If this statement is omitted, the default view
is
used, and if there is no default view, an error is triggered.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">search</strong></span> statement is equivalent to
the
<span><strong class="command">search</strong></span> statement in
<code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>. It provides a
list of domains
which are appended to relative names in queries.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">ndots</strong></span> statement is equivalent to
the
<span><strong class="command">ndots</strong></span> statement in
<code class="filename">/etc/resolv.conf</code>. It indicates the
minimum
number of dots in a relative domain name that should result in an
exact match lookup before search path elements are appended.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2578116"></a><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
<span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] { ( <em class="replaceable"><code>masters_list</code></em> |
<em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] [<span class="optional">key <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></span>] ) ; [<span class="optional">...</span>] };
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2578160"></a><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p><span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span>
lists allow for a common set of masters to be easily used by
multiple stub and slave zones.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2578174"></a><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
This is the grammar of the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span>
statement in the <code class="filename">named.conf</code> file:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> {
[<span class="optional"> attach-cache <em class="replaceable"><code>cache_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> version <em class="replaceable"><code>version_string</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> hostname <em class="replaceable"><code>hostname_string</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> server-id <em class="replaceable"><code>server_id_string</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> key-directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> managed-keys-directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> named-xfer <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> tkey-gssapi-keytab <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> tkey-gssapi-credential <em class="replaceable"><code>principal</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> tkey-domain <em class="replaceable"><code>domainname</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> tkey-dhkey <em class="replaceable"><code>key_name</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>key_tag</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> cache-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dump-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> bindkeys-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> secroots-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> session-keyfile <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> session-keyname <em class="replaceable"><code>key_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> session-keyalg <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm_id</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> memstatistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> memstatistics-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> pid-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> recursing-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> statistics-file <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> auth-nxdomain <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> deallocate-on-exit <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> fake-iquery <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> fetch-glue <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> flush-zones-on-shutdown <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> has-old-clients <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> host-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> host-statistics-max <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> minimal-responses <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> multiple-cnames <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>explicit</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>master-only</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> recursion <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> rfc2308-type1 <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-id-pool <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> maintain-ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-from-differences (<em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <code class="constant">master</code> | <code class="constant">slave</code>); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-enable <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-validation (<em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <code class="constant">auto</code>); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-lookaside ( <em class="replaceable"><code>auto</code></em> |
<em class="replaceable"><code>no</code></em> |
<em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em> trust-anchor <em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-must-be-secure <em class="replaceable"><code>domain yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-accept-expired <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forward ( <em class="replaceable"><code>only</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>first</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dual-stack-servers [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] {
( <em class="replaceable"><code>domain_name</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] |
<em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ) ;
... }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-names ( <em class="replaceable"><code>master</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>slave</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>response</code></em> )
( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-dup-records ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-mx ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-wildcard <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-integrity <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-mx-cname ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-srv-cname ( <em class="replaceable"><code>warn</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>fail</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ignore</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-sibling <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-new-zones { <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query-cache { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query-cache-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-transfer { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-recursion { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-recursion-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-update { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-update-forwarding { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> update-check-ksk <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-dnskey-kskonly <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-secure-to-insecure <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ;</span>]
[<span class="optional"> try-tcp-refresh <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-v6-synthesis { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> blackhole { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-v4-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> avoid-v4-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-v6-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> avoid-v6-udp-ports { <em class="replaceable"><code>port_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> listen-on [<span class="optional"> port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> </span>] { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> listen-on-v6 [<span class="optional"> port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> </span>] { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> query-source ( ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> )
[<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] |
[<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]
[<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] ) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> query-source-v6 ( ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> )
[<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] |
[<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]
[<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>] ) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-queryport-pool <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-ports <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-updateinterval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> tcp-clients <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> reserved-sockets <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> recursive-clients <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> serial-query-rate <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> serial-queries <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> tcp-listen-queue <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-format <em class="replaceable"><code>( one-answer | many-answers )</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfers-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfers-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfers-per-ns <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>)
[<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-alt-transfer-source <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-delay <em class="replaceable"><code>seconds</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-to-soa <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> also-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-ixfr-log-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-journal-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> coresize <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> datasize <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> files <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> stacksize <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> cleaning-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> heartbeat-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> interface-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> statistics-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> topology { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }</span>];
[<span class="optional"> sortlist { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }</span>];
[<span class="optional"> rrset-order { <em class="replaceable"><code>order_spec</code></em> ; [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>order_spec</code></em> ; ... </span>] </span>] };
[<span class="optional"> lame-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-ncache-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-cache-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-validity-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-signing-nodes <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-signing-signatures <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-signing-type <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-roots <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> provide-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> request-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> treat-cr-as-space <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> additional-from-auth <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> additional-from-cache <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> random-device <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-cache-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> match-mapped-addresses <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> filter-aaaa-on-v4 ( <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>break-dnssec</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> filter-aaaa { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dns64 <em class="replaceable"><code>IPv6-prefix</code></em> {
[<span class="optional"> clients { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> mapped { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> exclude { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> suffix IPv6-address; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> recursive-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> break-dnssec <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
}; </span>];
[<span class="optional"> dns64-server <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dns64-contact <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> </span>]
[<span class="optional"> preferred-glue ( <em class="replaceable"><code>A</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>AAAA</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>NONE</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> edns-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> root-delegation-only [<span class="optional"> exclude { <em class="replaceable"><code>namelist</code></em> } </span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> querylog <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> disable-algorithms <em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em> { <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em>;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>algorithm</code></em>; </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> acache-enable <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> acache-cleaning-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-acache-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> clients-per-query <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-clients-per-query <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> empty-server <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> empty-contact <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> empty-zones-enable <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> disable-empty-zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl-cache <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> resolver-query-timeout <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> deny-answer-addresses { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> } [<span class="optional"> except-from { <em class="replaceable"><code>namelist</code></em> } </span>];</span>]
[<span class="optional"> deny-answer-aliases { <em class="replaceable"><code>namelist</code></em> } [<span class="optional"> except-from { <em class="replaceable"><code>namelist</code></em> } </span>];</span>]
[<span class="optional"> response-policy { <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"> policy given | disabled | passthru | nxdomain | nodata | cname <em class="replaceable"><code>domain</code></em> </span>] ; } ; </span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="options"></a><span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement sets up global
options
to be used by <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>. This statement
may appear only
once in a configuration file. If there is no <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span>
statement, an options block with each option set to its default will
be used.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">attach-cache</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Allows multiple views to share a single cache
database.
Each view has its own cache database by default, but
if multiple views have the same operational policy
for name resolution and caching, those views can
share a single cache to save memory and possibly
improve resolution efficiency by using this option.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">attach-cache</strong></span> option
may also be specified in <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
statements, in which case it overrides the
global <span><strong class="command">attach-cache</strong></span> option.
</p>
<p>
The <em class="replaceable"><code>cache_name</code></em> specifies
the cache to be shared.
When the <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> server configures
views which are supposed to share a cache, it
creates a cache with the specified name for the
first view of these sharing views.
The rest of the views will simply refer to the
already created cache.
</p>
<p>
One common configuration to share a cache would be to
allow all views to share a single cache.
This can be done by specifying
the <span><strong class="command">attach-cache</strong></span> as a global
option with an arbitrary name.
</p>
<p>
Another possible operation is to allow a subset of
all views to share a cache while the others to
retain their own caches.
For example, if there are three views A, B, and C,
and only A and B should share a cache, specify the
<span><strong class="command">attach-cache</strong></span> option as a view A (or
B)'s option, referring to the other view name:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
view "A" {
// this view has its own cache
...
};
view "B" {
// this view refers to A's cache
attach-cache "A";
};
view "C" {
// this view has its own cache
...
};
</pre>
<p>
Views that share a cache must have the same policy
on configurable parameters that may affect caching.
The current implementation requires the following
configurable options be consistent among these
views:
<span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">cleaning-interval</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-accept-expired</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-validation</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">max-cache-ttl</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">max-cache-size</strong></span>, and
<span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
Note that there may be other parameters that may
cause confusion if they are inconsistent for
different views that share a single cache.
For example, if these views define different sets of
forwarders that can return different answers for the
same question, sharing the answer does not make
sense or could even be harmful.
It is administrator's responsibility to ensure
configuration differences in different views do
not cause disruption with a shared cache.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The working directory of the server.
Any non-absolute pathnames in the configuration file will be
taken
as relative to this directory. The default location for most
server
output files (e.g. <code class="filename">named.run</code>)
is this directory.
If a directory is not specified, the working directory
defaults to `<code class="filename">.</code>', the directory from
which the server
was started. The directory specified should be an absolute
path.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">key-directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
When performing dynamic update of secure zones, the
directory where the public and private DNSSEC key files
should be found, if different than the current working
directory. (Note that this option has no effect on the
paths for files containing non-DNSSEC keys such as
<code class="filename">bind.keys</code>,
<code class="filename">rndc.key</code> or
<code class="filename">session.key</code>.)
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">managed-keys-directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The directory used to hold the files used to track managed keys.
By default it is the working directory. It there are no
views then the file <code class="filename">managed-keys.bind</code>
otherwise a SHA256 hash of the view name is used with
<code class="filename">.mkeys</code> extension added.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">named-xfer</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete.</em></span> It
was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to specify
the pathname to the <span><strong class="command">named-xfer</strong></span>
program. In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, no separate
<span><strong class="command">named-xfer</strong></span> program is needed;
its functionality is built into the name server.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-gssapi-keytab</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The KRB5 keytab file to use for GSS-TSIG updates. If
this option is set and tkey-gssapi-credential is not
set, then updates will be allowed with any key
matching a principal in the specified keytab.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-gssapi-credential</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The security credential with which the server should
authenticate keys requested by the GSS-TSIG protocol.
Currently only Kerberos 5 authentication is available
and the credential is a Kerberos principal which the
server can acquire through the default system key
file, normally <code class="filename">/etc/krb5.keytab</code>.
The location keytab file can be overridden using the
tkey-gssapi-keytab option. Normally this principal is
of the form "<strong class="userinput"><code>DNS/</code></strong><code class="varname">server.domain</code>".
To use GSS-TSIG, <span><strong class="command">tkey-domain</strong></span> must
also be set if a specific keytab is not set with
tkey-gssapi-keytab.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-domain</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The domain appended to the names of all shared keys
generated with <span><strong class="command">TKEY</strong></span>. When a
client requests a <span><strong class="command">TKEY</strong></span> exchange,
it may or may not specify the desired name for the
key. If present, the name of the shared key will
be <code class="varname">client specified part</code> +
<code class="varname">tkey-domain</code>. Otherwise, the
name of the shared key will be <code class="varname">random hex
digits</code> + <code class="varname">tkey-domain</code>.
In most cases, the <span><strong class="command">domainname</strong></span>
should be the server's domain name, or an otherwise
non-existent subdomain like
"_tkey.<code class="varname">domainname</code>". If you are
using GSS-TSIG, this variable must be defined, unless
you specify a specific keytab using tkey-gssapi-keytab.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tkey-dhkey</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The Diffie-Hellman key used by the server
to generate shared keys with clients using the Diffie-Hellman
mode
of <span><strong class="command">TKEY</strong></span>. The server must be
able to load the
public and private keys from files in the working directory.
In
most cases, the keyname should be the server's host name.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">cache-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This is for testing only. Do not use.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dump-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file the server dumps
the database to when instructed to do so with
<span><strong class="command">rndc dumpdb</strong></span>.
If not specified, the default is <code class="filename">named_dump.db</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">memstatistics-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file the server writes memory
usage statistics to on exit. If not specified,
the default is <code class="filename">named.memstats</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">pid-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file the server writes its process ID
in. If not specified, the default is
<code class="filename">/var/run/named/named.pid</code>.
The PID file is used by programs that want to send signals to
the running
name server. Specifying <span><strong class="command">pid-file none</strong></span> disables the
use of a PID file — no file will be written and any
existing one will be removed. Note that <span><strong class="command">none</strong></span>
is a keyword, not a filename, and therefore is not enclosed
in
double quotes.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">recursing-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file the server dumps
the queries that are currently recursing when instructed
to do so with <span><strong class="command">rndc recursing</strong></span>.
If not specified, the default is <code class="filename">named.recursing</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file the server appends statistics
to when instructed to do so using <span><strong class="command">rndc stats</strong></span>.
If not specified, the default is <code class="filename">named.stats</code> in the
server's current directory. The format of the file is
described
in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statsfile" title="The Statistics File">the section called “The Statistics File”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">bindkeys-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of a file to override the built-in trusted
keys provided by <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>.
See the discussion of <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span>
and <span><strong class="command">dnssec-validation</strong></span> for details.
If not specified, the default is
<code class="filename">/etc/bind.keys</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">secroots-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file the server dumps
security roots to when instructed to do so with
<span><strong class="command">rndc secroots</strong></span>.
If not specified, the default is
<code class="filename">named.secroots</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">session-keyfile</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The pathname of the file into which to write a TSIG
session key generated by <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> for use by
<span><strong class="command">nsupdate -l</strong></span>. If not specified, the
default is <code class="filename">/var/run/named/session.key</code>.
(See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#dynamic_update_policies" title="Dynamic Update Policies">the section called “Dynamic Update Policies”</a>, and in
particular the discussion of the
<span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement's
<strong class="userinput"><code>local</code></strong> option for more
information about this feature.)
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">session-keyname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The key name to use for the TSIG session key.
If not specified, the default is "local-ddns".
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">session-keyalg</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The algorithm to use for the TSIG session key.
Valid values are hmac-sha1, hmac-sha224, hmac-sha256,
hmac-sha384, hmac-sha512 and hmac-md5. If not
specified, the default is hmac-sha256.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">port</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The UDP/TCP port number the server uses for
receiving and sending DNS protocol traffic.
The default is 53. This option is mainly intended for server
testing;
a server using a port other than 53 will not be able to
communicate with
the global DNS.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">random-device</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The source of entropy to be used by the server. Entropy is
primarily needed
for DNSSEC operations, such as TKEY transactions and dynamic
update of signed
zones. This options specifies the device (or file) from which
to read
entropy. If this is a file, operations requiring entropy will
fail when the
file has been exhausted. If not specified, the default value
is
<code class="filename">/dev/random</code>
(or equivalent) when present, and none otherwise. The
<span><strong class="command">random-device</strong></span> option takes
effect during
the initial configuration load at server startup time and
is ignored on subsequent reloads.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">preferred-glue</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If specified, the listed type (A or AAAA) will be emitted
before other glue
in the additional section of a query response.
The default is not to prefer any type (NONE).
</p></dd>
<dt>
<a name="root_delegation_only"></a><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">root-delegation-only</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>
Turn on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs
(top level domains) and root zones with an optional
exclude list.
</p>
<p>
DS queries are expected to be made to and be answered by
delegation only zones. Such queries and responses are
treated as an exception to delegation-only processing
and are not converted to NXDOMAIN responses provided
a CNAME is not discovered at the query name.
</p>
<p>
If a delegation only zone server also serves a child
zone it is not always possible to determine whether
an answer comes from the delegation only zone or the
child zone. SOA NS and DNSKEY records are apex
only records and a matching response that contains
these records or DS is treated as coming from a
child zone. RRSIG records are also examined to see
if they are signed by a child zone or not. The
authority section is also examined to see if there
is evidence that the answer is from the child zone.
Answers that are determined to be from a child zone
are not converted to NXDOMAIN responses. Despite
all these checks there is still a possibility of
false negatives when a child zone is being served.
</p>
<p>
Similarly false positives can arise from empty nodes
(no records at the name) in the delegation only zone
when the query type is not ANY.
</p>
<p>
Note some TLDs are not delegation only (e.g. "DE", "LV",
"US" and "MUSEUM"). This list is not exhaustive.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
options {
root-delegation-only exclude { "de"; "lv"; "us"; "museum"; };
};
</pre>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">disable-algorithms</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Disable the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the
specified name.
Multiple <span><strong class="command">disable-algorithms</strong></span>
statements are allowed.
Only the most specific will be applied.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
When set, <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> provides the
validator with an alternate method to validate DNSKEY
records at the top of a zone. When a DNSKEY is at or
below a domain specified by the deepest
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span>, and the normal DNSSEC
validation has left the key untrusted, the trust-anchor
will be appended to the key name and a DLV record will be
looked up to see if it can validate the key. If the DLV
record validates a DNSKEY (similarly to the way a DS
record does) the DNSKEY RRset is deemed to be trusted.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> is set to
<strong class="userinput"><code>auto</code></strong>, then built-in default
values for the DLV domain and trust anchor will be
used, along with a built-in key for validation.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> is set to
<strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, then dnssec-lookaside
is not used.
</p>
<p>
The default DLV key is stored in the file
<code class="filename">bind.keys</code>;
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will load that key at
startup if <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> is set to
<code class="constant">auto</code>. A copy of the file is
installed along with <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, and is
current as of the release date. If the DLV key expires, a
new copy of <code class="filename">bind.keys</code> can be downloaded
from <a href="" target="_top">https://www.isc.org/solutions/dlv</a>.
</p>
<p>
(To prevent problems if <code class="filename">bind.keys</code> is
not found, the current key is also compiled in to
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>. Relying on this is not
recommended, however, as it requires <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
to be recompiled with a new key when the DLV key expires.)
</p>
<p>
NOTE: <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> only loads certain specific
keys from <code class="filename">bind.keys</code>: those for the
DLV zone and for the DNS root zone. The file cannot be
used to store keys for other zones.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-must-be-secure</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specify hierarchies which must be or may not be secure
(signed and validated). If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>,
then <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will only accept answers if
they are secure. If <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, then normal
DNSSEC validation applies allowing for insecure answers to
be accepted. The specified domain must be under a
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement, or
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> must be active.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dns64</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
This directive instructs <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to
return mapped IPv4 addresses to AAAA queries when
there are no AAAA records. It is intended to be
used in conjunction with a NAT64. Each
<span><strong class="command">dns64</strong></span> defines one DNS64 prefix.
Multiple DNS64 prefixes can be defined.
</p>
<p>
Compatible IPv6 prefixes have lengths of 32, 40, 48, 56,
64 and 96 as per RFC 6052.
</p>
<p>
Additionally a reverse IP6.ARPA zone will be created for
the prefix to provide a mapping from the IP6.ARPA names
to the corresponding IN-ADDR.ARPA names using synthesized
CNAMEs. <span><strong class="command">dns64-server</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">dns64-contact</strong></span> can be used to specify
the name of the server and contact for the zones. These
are settable at the view / options level. These are
not settable on a per-prefix basis.
</p>
<p>
Each <span><strong class="command">dns64</strong></span> supports an optional
<span><strong class="command">clients</strong></span> ACL that determines which
clients are affected by this directive. If not defined,
it defaults to <strong class="userinput"><code>any;</code></strong>.
</p>
<p>
Each <span><strong class="command">dns64</strong></span> supports an optional
<span><strong class="command">mapped</strong></span> ACL that selects which
IPv4 addresses are to be mapped in the corresponding
A RRset. If not defined it defaults to
<strong class="userinput"><code>any;</code></strong>.
</p>
<p>
Normally, DNS64 won't apply to a domain name that
owns one or more AAAA records; these records will
simply be returned. The optional
<span><strong class="command">exclude</strong></span> ACL allows specification
of a list of IPv6 addresses that will be ignored
if they appear in a domain name's AAAA records, and
DNS64 will be applied to any A records the domain
name owns. If not defined, <span><strong class="command">exclude</strong></span>
defaults to none.
</p>
<p>
A optional <span><strong class="command">suffix</strong></span> can also
be defined to set the bits trailing the mapped
IPv4 address bits. By default these bits are
set to <strong class="userinput"><code>::</code></strong>. The bits
matching the prefix and mapped IPv4 address
must be zero.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">recursive-only</strong></span> is set to
<span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span> the DNS64 synthesis will
only happen for recursive queries. The default
is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">break-dnssec</strong></span> is set to
<span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span> the DNS64 synthesis will
happen even if the result, if validated, would
cause a DNSSEC validation failure. If this option
is set to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> (the default), the DO
is set on the incoming query, and there are RRSIGs on
the applicable records, then synthesis will not happen.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
acl rfc1918 { 10/8; 192.168/16; 172.16/12; };
dns64 64:FF9B::/96 {
clients { any; };
mapped { !rfc1918; any; };
exclude { 64:FF9B::/96; ::ffff:0000:0000/96; };
suffix ::;
};
</pre>
</dd>
</dl></div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="boolean_options"></a>Boolean Options</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-new-zones</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then zones can be
added at runtime via <span><strong class="command">rndc addzone</strong></span>
or deleted via <span><strong class="command">rndc delzone</strong></span>.
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">auth-nxdomain</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then the <span><strong class="command">AA</strong></span> bit
is always set on NXDOMAIN responses, even if the server is
not actually
authoritative. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>;
this is
a change from <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8. If you
are using very old DNS software, you
may need to set it to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">deallocate-on-exit</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
8 to enable checking
for memory leaks on exit. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option and always performs
the checks.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">memstatistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Write memory statistics to the file specified by
<span><strong class="command">memstatistics-file</strong></span> at exit.
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong> unless
'-m record' is specified on the command line in
which case it is <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then the
server treats all zones as if they are doing zone transfers
across
a dial-on-demand dialup link, which can be brought up by
traffic
originating from this server. This has different effects
according
to zone type and concentrates the zone maintenance so that
it all
happens in a short interval, once every <span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span> and
hopefully during the one call. It also suppresses some of
the normal
zone maintenance traffic. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span> option
may also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statements,
in which case it overrides the global <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span>
option.
</p>
<p>
If the zone is a master zone, then the server will send out a
NOTIFY
request to all the slaves (default). This should trigger the
zone serial
number check in the slave (providing it supports NOTIFY)
allowing the slave
to verify the zone while the connection is active.
The set of servers to which NOTIFY is sent can be controlled
by
<span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
If the
zone is a slave or stub zone, then the server will suppress
the regular
"zone up to date" (refresh) queries and only perform them
when the
<span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span> expires in
addition to sending
NOTIFY requests.
</p>
<p>
Finer control can be achieved by using
<strong class="userinput"><code>notify</code></strong> which only sends NOTIFY
messages,
<strong class="userinput"><code>notify-passive</code></strong> which sends NOTIFY
messages and
suppresses the normal refresh queries, <strong class="userinput"><code>refresh</code></strong>
which suppresses normal refresh processing and sends refresh
queries
when the <span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span>
expires, and
<strong class="userinput"><code>passive</code></strong> which just disables normal
refresh
processing.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
dialup mode
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
normal refresh
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
heart-beat refresh
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
heart-beat notify
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> (default)</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">refresh</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">passive</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">notify-passive</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
no
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
yes
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by
<span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">fake-iquery</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, this option
enabled simulating the obsolete DNS query type
IQUERY. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 never does
IQUERY simulation.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">fetch-glue</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is obsolete.
In BIND 8, <strong class="userinput"><code>fetch-glue yes</code></strong>
caused the server to attempt to fetch glue resource records
it
didn't have when constructing the additional
data section of a response. This is now considered a bad
idea
and BIND 9 never does it.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">flush-zones-on-shutdown</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
When the nameserver exits due receiving SIGTERM,
flush or do not flush any pending zone writes. The default
is
<span><strong class="command">flush-zones-on-shutdown</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">has-old-clients</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option was incorrectly implemented
in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, and is ignored by <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
To achieve the intended effect
of
<span><strong class="command">has-old-clients</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, specify
the two separate options <span><strong class="command">auth-nxdomain</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>
and <span><strong class="command">rfc2308-type1</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong> instead.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">host-statistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
In BIND 8, this enables keeping of
statistics for every host that the name server interacts
with.
Not implemented in BIND 9.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">maintain-ixfr-base</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete</em></span>.
It was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to
determine whether a transaction log was
kept for Incremental Zone Transfer. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 maintains a transaction
log whenever possible. If you need to disable outgoing
incremental zone
transfers, use <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">minimal-responses</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then when generating
responses the server will only add records to the authority
and additional data sections when they are required (e.g.
delegations, negative responses). This may improve the
performance of the server.
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">multiple-cnames</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to allow
a domain name to have multiple CNAME records in violation of
the DNS standards. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.2 onwards
always strictly enforces the CNAME rules both in master
files and dynamic updates.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> (the default),
DNS NOTIFY messages are sent when a zone the server is
authoritative for
changes, see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#notify" title="Notify">the section called “Notify”</a>. The messages are
sent to the
servers listed in the zone's NS records (except the master
server identified
in the SOA MNAME field), and to any servers listed in the
<span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> option.
</p>
<p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>master-only</code></strong>, notifies are only
sent
for master zones.
If <strong class="userinput"><code>explicit</code></strong>, notifies are sent only
to
servers explicitly listed using <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>.
If <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, no notifies are sent.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span> option may also be
specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
statement,
in which case it overrides the <span><strong class="command">options notify</strong></span> statement.
It would only be necessary to turn off this option if it
caused slaves
to crash.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-to-soa</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> do not check the nameservers
in the NS RRset against the SOA MNAME. Normally a NOTIFY
message is not sent to the SOA MNAME (SOA ORIGIN) as it is
supposed to contain the name of the ultimate master.
Sometimes, however, a slave is listed as the SOA MNAME in
hidden master configurations and in that case you would
want the ultimate master to still send NOTIFY messages to
all the nameservers listed in the NS RRset.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">recursion</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, and a
DNS query requests recursion, then the server will attempt
to do
all the work required to answer the query. If recursion is
off
and the server does not already know the answer, it will
return a
referral response. The default is
<strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
Note that setting <span><strong class="command">recursion no</strong></span> does not prevent
clients from getting data from the server's cache; it only
prevents new data from being cached as an effect of client
queries.
Caching may still occur as an effect the server's internal
operation, such as NOTIFY address lookups.
See also <span><strong class="command">fetch-glue</strong></span> above.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">rfc2308-type1</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Setting this to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> will
cause the server to send NS records along with the SOA
record for negative
answers. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
Not yet implemented in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
9.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-id-pool</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete</em></span>.
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 always allocates query
IDs from a pool.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zone-statistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, the server will collect
statistical data on all zones (unless specifically turned
off
on a per-zone basis by specifying <span><strong class="command">zone-statistics no</strong></span>
in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement).
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
These statistics may be accessed
using <span><strong class="command">rndc stats</strong></span>, which will
dump them to the file listed
in the <span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span>. See
also <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statsfile" title="The Statistics File">the section called “The Statistics File”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-ixfr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>This option is obsolete</em></span>.
If you need to disable IXFR to a particular server or
servers, see
the information on the <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> option
in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage" title="server Statement Definition and
Usage">the section called “<span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage”</a>.
See also
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#incremental_zone_transfers" title="Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)">the section called “Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> in
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage" title="server Statement Definition and
Usage">the section called “<span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> in
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_statement_definition_and_usage" title="server Statement Definition and
Usage">the section called “<span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">treat-cr-as-space</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
8 to make
the server treat carriage return ("<span><strong class="command">\r</strong></span>") characters the same way
as a space or tab character,
to facilitate loading of zone files on a UNIX system that
were generated
on an NT or DOS machine. In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, both UNIX "<span><strong class="command">\n</strong></span>"
and NT/DOS "<span><strong class="command">\r\n</strong></span>" newlines
are always accepted,
and the option is ignored.
</p></dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">additional-from-auth</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>
These options control the behavior of an authoritative
server when
answering queries which have additional data, or when
following CNAME
and DNAME chains.
</p>
<p>
When both of these options are set to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>
(the default) and a
query is being answered from authoritative data (a zone
configured into the server), the additional data section of
the
reply will be filled in using data from other authoritative
zones
and from the cache. In some situations this is undesirable,
such
as when there is concern over the correctness of the cache,
or
in servers where slave zones may be added and modified by
untrusted third parties. Also, avoiding
the search for this additional data will speed up server
operations
at the possible expense of additional queries to resolve
what would
otherwise be provided in the additional section.
</p>
<p>
For example, if a query asks for an MX record for host <code class="literal">foo.example.com</code>,
and the record found is "<code class="literal">MX 10 mail.example.net</code>", normally the address
records (A and AAAA) for <code class="literal">mail.example.net</code> will be provided as well,
if known, even though they are not in the example.com zone.
Setting these options to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>
disables this behavior and makes
the server only search for additional data in the zone it
answers from.
</p>
<p>
These options are intended for use in authoritative-only
servers, or in authoritative-only views. Attempts to set
them to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> without also
specifying
<span><strong class="command">recursion no</strong></span> will cause the
server to
ignore the options and log a warning message.
</p>
<p>
Specifying <span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache no</strong></span> actually
disables the use of the cache not only for additional data
lookups
but also when looking up the answer. This is usually the
desired
behavior in an authoritative-only server where the
correctness of
the cached data is an issue.
</p>
<p>
When a name server is non-recursively queried for a name
that is not
below the apex of any served zone, it normally answers with
an
"upwards referral" to the root servers or the servers of
some other
known parent of the query name. Since the data in an
upwards referral
comes from the cache, the server will not be able to provide
upwards
referrals when <span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache no</strong></span>
has been specified. Instead, it will respond to such
queries
with REFUSED. This should not cause any problems since
upwards referrals are not required for the resolution
process.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">match-mapped-addresses</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then an
IPv4-mapped IPv6 address will match any address match
list entries that match the corresponding IPv4 address.
</p>
<p>
This option was introduced to work around a kernel quirk
in some operating systems that causes IPv4 TCP
connections, such as zone transfers, to be accepted on an
IPv6 socket using mapped addresses. This caused address
match lists designed for IPv4 to fail to match. However,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> now solves this problem
internally. The use of this option is discouraged.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">filter-aaaa-on-v4</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
This option is only available when
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 is compiled with the
<strong class="userinput"><code>--enable-filter-aaaa</code></strong> option on the
"configure" command line. It is intended to help the
transition from IPv4 to IPv6 by not giving IPv6 addresses
to DNS clients unless they have connections to the IPv6
Internet. This is not recommended unless absolutely
necessary. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
The <span><strong class="command">filter-aaaa-on-v4</strong></span> option
may also be specified in <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements
to override the global <span><strong class="command">filter-aaaa-on-v4</strong></span>
option.
</p>
<p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>,
the DNS client is at an IPv4 address, in <span><strong class="command">filter-aaaa</strong></span>,
and if the response does not include DNSSEC signatures,
then all AAAA records are deleted from the response.
This filtering applies to all responses and not only
authoritative responses.
</p>
<p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>break-dnssec</code></strong>,
then AAAA records are deleted even when dnssec is enabled.
As suggested by the name, this makes the response not verify,
because the DNSSEC protocol is designed detect deletions.
</p>
<p>
This mechanism can erroneously cause other servers to
not give AAAA records to their clients.
A recursing server with both IPv6 and IPv4 network connections
that queries an authoritative server using this mechanism
via IPv4 will be denied AAAA records even if its client is
using IPv6.
</p>
<p>
This mechanism is applied to authoritative as well as
non-authoritative records.
A client using IPv4 that is not allowed recursion can
erroneously be given AAAA records because the server is not
allowed to check for A records.
</p>
<p>
Some AAAA records are given to IPv4 clients in glue records.
IPv4 clients that are servers can then erroneously
answer requests for AAAA records received via IPv4.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
When <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> and the server loads a new version of a master
zone from its zone file or receives a new version of a slave
file by a non-incremental zone transfer, it will compare
the new version to the previous one and calculate a set
of differences. The differences are then logged in the
zone's journal file such that the changes can be transmitted
to downstream slaves as an incremental zone transfer.
</p>
<p>
By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for
non-dynamic zones, this option saves bandwidth at the
expense of increased CPU and memory consumption at the
master.
In particular, if the new version of a zone is completely
different from the previous one, the set of differences
will be of a size comparable to the combined size of the
old and new zone version, and the server will need to
temporarily allocate memory to hold this complete
difference set.
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span>
also accepts <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> at the view and options
levels which causes
<span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span> to be enabled for
all <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> zones respectively.
It is off by default.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">multi-master</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This should be set when you have multiple masters for a zone
and the
addresses refer to different machines. If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will
not log
when the serial number on the master is less than what <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
currently
has. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-enable</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Enable DNSSEC support in <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>. Unless set to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> behaves as if it does not support DNSSEC.
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-validation</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Enable DNSSEC validation in <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>.
Note <span><strong class="command">dnssec-enable</strong></span> also needs to be
set to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong> to be effective.
If set to <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>, DNSSEC validation
is disabled. If set to <strong class="userinput"><code>auto</code></strong>,
DNSSEC validation is enabled, and a default
trust-anchor for the DNS root zone is used. If set to
<strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, DNSSEC validation is enabled,
but a trust anchor must be manually configured using
a <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement. The default
is <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-accept-expired</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Accept expired signatures when verifying DNSSEC signatures.
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>no</code></strong>.
Setting this option to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>
leaves <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> vulnerable to
replay attacks.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">querylog</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specify whether query logging should be started when <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
starts.
If <span><strong class="command">querylog</strong></span> is not specified,
then the query logging
is determined by the presence of the logging category <span><strong class="command">queries</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax
of
certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses
received
from the network. The default varies according to usage
area. For
<span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> zones the default is <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span>.
For <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> zones the default
is <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
For answers received from the network (<span><strong class="command">response</strong></span>)
the default is <span><strong class="command">ignore</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
The rules for legal hostnames and mail domains are derived
from RFC 952 and RFC 821 as modified by RFC 1123.
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span>
applies to the owner names of A, AAAA and MX records.
It also applies to the domain names in the RDATA of NS, SOA,
MX, and SRV records.
It also applies to the RDATA of PTR records where the owner
name indicated that it is a reverse lookup of a hostname
(the owner name ends in IN-ADDR.ARPA, IP6.ARPA, or IP6.INT).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-dup-records</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Check master zones for records that are treated as different
by DNSSEC but are semantically equal in plain DNS. The
default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>. Other possible
values are <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">ignore</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-mx</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Check whether the MX record appears to refer to a IP address.
The default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>. Other possible
values are <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">ignore</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-wildcard</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is used to check for non-terminal wildcards.
The use of non-terminal wildcards is almost always as a
result of a failure
to understand the wildcard matching algorithm (RFC 1034).
This option
affects master zones. The default (<span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>) is to check
for non-terminal wildcards and issue a warning.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Perform post load zone integrity checks on master
zones. This checks that MX and SRV records refer
to address (A or AAAA) records and that glue
address records exist for delegated zones. For
MX and SRV records only in-zone hostnames are
checked (for out-of-zone hostnames use
<span><strong class="command">named-checkzone</strong></span>).
For NS records only names below top of zone are
checked (for out-of-zone names and glue consistency
checks use <span><strong class="command">named-checkzone</strong></span>).
The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-mx-cname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span> is set then
fail, warn or ignore MX records that refer
to CNAMES. The default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-srv-cname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span> is set then
fail, warn or ignore SRV records that refer
to CNAMES. The default is to <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-sibling</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
When performing integrity checks, also check that
sibling glue exists. The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
When returning authoritative negative responses to
SOA queries set the TTL of the SOA record returned in
the authority section to zero.
The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl-cache</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
When caching a negative response to a SOA query
set the TTL to zero.
The default is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
When set to the default value of <code class="literal">yes</code>,
check the KSK bit in each key to determine how the key
should be used when generating RRSIGs for a secure zone.
</p>
<p>
Ordinarily, zone-signing keys (that is, keys without the
KSK bit set) are used to sign the entire zone, while
key-signing keys (keys with the KSK bit set) are only
used to sign the DNSKEY RRset at the zone apex.
However, if this option is set to <code class="literal">no</code>,
then the KSK bit is ignored; KSKs are treated as if they
were ZSKs and are used to sign the entire zone. This is
similar to the <span><strong class="command">dnssec-signzone -z</strong></span>
command line option.
</p>
<p>
When this option is set to <code class="literal">yes</code>, there
must be at least two active keys for every algorithm
represented in the DNSKEY RRset: at least one KSK and one
ZSK per algorithm. If there is any algorithm for which
this requirement is not met, this option will be ignored
for that algorithm.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-dnskey-kskonly</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
When this option and <span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span>
are both set to <code class="literal">yes</code>, only key-signing
keys (that is, keys with the KSK bit set) will be used
to sign the DNSKEY RRset at the zone apex. Zone-signing
keys (keys without the KSK bit set) will be used to sign
the remainder of the zone, but not the DNSKEY RRset.
This is similar to the
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-signzone -x</strong></span> command line option.
</p>
<p>
The default is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>. If
<span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span> is set to
<code class="literal">no</code>, this option is ignored.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">try-tcp-refresh</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Try to refresh the zone using TCP if UDP queries fail.
For BIND 8 compatibility, the default is
<span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-secure-to-insecure</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Allow a dynamic zone to transition from secure to
insecure (i.e., signed to unsigned) by deleting all
of the DNSKEY records. The default is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
If set to <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>, and if the DNSKEY RRset
at the zone apex is deleted, all RRSIG and NSEC records
will be removed from the zone as well.
</p>
<p>
If the zone uses NSEC3, then it is also necessary to
delete the NSEC3PARAM RRset from the zone apex; this will
cause the removal of all corresponding NSEC3 records.
(It is expected that this requirement will be eliminated
in a future release.)
</p>
<p>
Note that if a zone has been configured with
<span><strong class="command">auto-dnssec maintain</strong></span> and the
private keys remain accessible in the key repository,
then the zone will be automatically signed again the
next time <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is started.
</p>
</dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2583643"></a>Forwarding</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide
cache on a few servers, reducing traffic over links to external
name servers. It can also be used to allow queries by servers that
do not have direct access to the Internet, but wish to look up
exterior
names anyway. Forwarding occurs only on those queries for which
the server is not authoritative and does not have the answer in
its cache.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is only meaningful if the
forwarders list is not empty. A value of <code class="varname">first</code>,
the default, causes the server to query the forwarders
first — and
if that doesn't answer the question, the server will then
look for
the answer itself. If <code class="varname">only</code> is
specified, the
server will only query the forwarders.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies the IP addresses to be used
for forwarding. The default is the empty list (no
forwarding).
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
<p>
Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing
for the global forwarding options to be overridden in a variety
of ways. You can set particular domains to use different
forwarders,
or have a different <span><strong class="command">forward only/first</strong></span> behavior,
or not forward at all, see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_statement_grammar" title="zone
Statement Grammar">the section called “<span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
Statement Grammar”</a>.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2583702"></a>Dual-stack Servers</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort to work
around
problems in reachability due the lack of support for either IPv4
or IPv6
on the host machine.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dual-stack-servers</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies host names or addresses of machines with access to
both IPv4 and IPv6 transports. If a hostname is used, the
server must be able
to resolve the name using only the transport it has. If the
machine is dual
stacked, then the <span><strong class="command">dual-stack-servers</strong></span> have no effect unless
access to a transport has been disabled on the command line
(e.g. <span><strong class="command">named -4</strong></span>).
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="access_control"></a>Access Control</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address
of the requesting system. See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#address_match_lists" title="Address Match Lists">the section called “Address Match Lists”</a> for
details on how to specify IP address lists.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
notify this server, a slave, of zone changes in addition
to the zone masters.
<span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span> may also be
specified in the
<span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement, in which case
it overrides the
<span><strong class="command">options allow-notify</strong></span>
statement. It is only meaningful
for a slave zone. If not specified, the default is to
process notify messages
only from a zone's master.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to ask ordinary
DNS questions. <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span> may
also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
statement, in which case it overrides the
<span><strong class="command">options allow-query</strong></span> statement.
If not specified, the default is to allow queries
from all hosts.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span> is now
used to specify access to the cache.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Specifies which local addresses can accept ordinary
DNS questions. This makes it possible, for instance,
to allow queries on internal-facing interfaces but
disallow them on external-facing ones, without
necessarily knowing the internal network's addresses.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span> may
also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
statement, in which case it overrides the
<span><strong class="command">options allow-query-on</strong></span> statement.
</p>
<p>
If not specified, the default is to allow queries
on all addresses.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span> is
used to specify access to the cache.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to get answers
from the cache. If <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span>
is not set then <span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span>
is used if set, otherwise <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span>
is used if set unless <span><strong class="command">recursion no;</strong></span> is
set in which case <span><strong class="command">none;</strong></span> is used,
otherwise the default (<span><strong class="command">localnets;</strong></span>
<span><strong class="command">localhost;</strong></span>) is used.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which local addresses can give answers
from the cache. If not specified, the default is
to allow cache queries on any address,
<span><strong class="command">localnets</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">localhost</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to make recursive
queries through this server. If
<span><strong class="command">allow-recursion</strong></span> is not set
then <span><strong class="command">allow-query-cache</strong></span> is
used if set, otherwise <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span>
is used if set, otherwise the default
(<span><strong class="command">localnets;</strong></span>
<span><strong class="command">localhost;</strong></span>) is used.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-recursion-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which local addresses can accept recursive
queries. If not specified, the default is to allow
recursive queries on all addresses.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
submit Dynamic DNS updates for master zones. The default is
to deny
updates from all hosts. Note that allowing updates based
on the requestor's IP address is insecure; see
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html#dynamic_update_security" title="Dynamic Update Security">the section called “Dynamic Update Security”</a> for details.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
submit Dynamic DNS updates to slave zones to be forwarded to
the
master. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>{ none; }</code></strong>,
which
means that no update forwarding will be performed. To
enable
update forwarding, specify
<strong class="userinput"><code>allow-update-forwarding { any; };</code></strong>.
Specifying values other than <strong class="userinput"><code>{ none; }</code></strong> or
<strong class="userinput"><code>{ any; }</code></strong> is usually
counterproductive, since
the responsibility for update access control should rest
with the
master server, not the slaves.
</p>
<p>
Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a slave
server
may expose master servers relying on insecure IP address
based
access control to attacks; see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html#dynamic_update_security" title="Dynamic Update Security">the section called “Dynamic Update Security”</a>
for more details.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-v6-synthesis</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option was introduced for the smooth transition from
AAAA
to A6 and from "nibble labels" to binary labels.
However, since both A6 and binary labels were then
deprecated,
this option was also deprecated.
It is now ignored with some warning messages.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
receive zone transfers from the server. <span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span> may
also be specified in the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
statement, in which
case it overrides the <span><strong class="command">options allow-transfer</strong></span> statement.
If not specified, the default is to allow transfers to all
hosts.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">blackhole</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies a list of addresses that the
server will not accept queries from or use to resolve a
query. Queries
from these addresses will not be responded to. The default
is <strong class="userinput"><code>none</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">filter-aaaa</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies a list of addresses to which
<span><strong class="command">filter-aaaa-on-v4</strong></span>
is applies. The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>any</code></strong>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">resolver-query-timeout</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The amount of time the resolver will spend attempting
to resolve a recursive query before failing. The
default is <code class="literal">10</code> and the maximum is
<code class="literal">30</code>. Setting it to <code class="literal">0</code>
will result in the default being used.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2584322"></a>Interfaces</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The interfaces and ports that the server will answer queries
from may be specified using the <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> option. <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> takes
an optional port and an <code class="varname">address_match_list</code>.
The server will listen on all interfaces allowed by the address
match list. If a port is not specified, port 53 will be used.
</p>
<p>
Multiple <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> statements are
allowed.
For example,
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">listen-on { 5.6.7.8; };
listen-on port 1234 { !1.2.3.4; 1.2/16; };
</pre>
<p>
will enable the name server on port 53 for the IP address
5.6.7.8, and on port 1234 of an address on the machine in net
1.2 that is not 1.2.3.4.
</p>
<p>
If no <span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> is specified, the
server will listen on port 53 on all IPv4 interfaces.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> option is used to
specify the interfaces and the ports on which the server will
listen
for incoming queries sent using IPv6.
</p>
<p>
When </p>
<pre class="programlisting">{ any; }</pre>
<p> is
specified
as the <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> for the
<span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> option,
the server does not bind a separate socket to each IPv6 interface
address as it does for IPv4 if the operating system has enough API
support for IPv6 (specifically if it conforms to RFC 3493 and RFC
3542).
Instead, it listens on the IPv6 wildcard address.
If the system only has incomplete API support for IPv6, however,
the behavior is the same as that for IPv4.
</p>
<p>
A list of particular IPv6 addresses can also be specified, in
which case
the server listens on a separate socket for each specified
address,
regardless of whether the desired API is supported by the system.
</p>
<p>
Multiple <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> options can
be used.
For example,
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">listen-on-v6 { any; };
listen-on-v6 port 1234 { !2001:db8::/32; any; };
</pre>
<p>
will enable the name server on port 53 for any IPv6 addresses
(with a single wildcard socket),
and on port 1234 of IPv6 addresses that is not in the prefix
2001:db8::/32 (with separate sockets for each matched address.)
</p>
<p>
To make the server not listen on any IPv6 address, use
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">listen-on-v6 { none; };
</pre>
<p>
If no <span><strong class="command">listen-on-v6</strong></span> option is
specified, the server will not listen on any IPv6 address
unless <span><strong class="command">-6</strong></span> is specified when <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is
invoked. If <span><strong class="command">-6</strong></span> is specified then
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will listen on port 53 on all IPv6 interfaces by default.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="query_address"></a>Query Address</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
If the server doesn't know the answer to a question, it will
query other name servers. <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> specifies
the address and port used for such queries. For queries sent over
IPv6, there is a separate <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> option.
If <span><strong class="command">address</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">*</strong></span> (asterisk) or is omitted,
a wildcard IP address (<span><strong class="command">INADDR_ANY</strong></span>)
will be used.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">port</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">*</strong></span> or is omitted,
a random port number from a pre-configured
range is picked up and will be used for each query.
The port range(s) is that specified in
the <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> (for IPv4)
and <span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> (for IPv6)
options, excluding the ranges specified in
the <span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span>
and <span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> options, respectively.
</p>
<p>
The defaults of the <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> options
are:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">query-source address * port *;
query-source-v6 address * port *;
</pre>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> is unspecified,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will check if the operating
system provides a programming interface to retrieve the
system's default range for ephemeral ports.
If such an interface is available,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will use the corresponding system
default range; otherwise, it will use its own defaults:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">use-v4-udp-ports { range 1024 65535; };
use-v6-udp-ports { range 1024 65535; };
</pre>
<p>
Note: make sure the ranges be sufficiently large for
security. A desirable size depends on various parameters,
but we generally recommend it contain at least 16384 ports
(14 bits of entropy).
Note also that the system's default range when used may be
too small for this purpose, and that the range may even be
changed while <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is running; the new
range will automatically be applied when <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
is reloaded.
It is encouraged to
configure <span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> explicitly so that the
ranges are sufficiently large and are reasonably
independent from the ranges used by other applications.
</p>
<p>
Note: the operational configuration
where <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> runs may prohibit the use
of some ports. For example, UNIX systems will not allow
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> running without a root privilege
to use ports less than 1024.
If such ports are included in the specified (or detected)
set of query ports, the corresponding query attempts will
fail, resulting in resolution failures or delay.
It is therefore important to configure the set of ports
that can be safely used in the expected operational environment.
</p>
<p>
The defaults of the <span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> options
are:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">avoid-v4-udp-ports {};
avoid-v6-udp-ports {};
</pre>
<p>
Note: BIND 9.5.0 introduced
the <span><strong class="command">use-queryport-pool</strong></span>
option to support a pool of such random ports, but this
option is now obsolete because reusing the same ports in
the pool may not be sufficiently secure.
For the same reason, it is generally strongly discouraged to
specify a particular port for the
<span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> options;
it implicitly disables the use of randomized port numbers.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-queryport-pool</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is obsolete.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">queryport-pool-ports</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is obsolete.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">queryport-pool-updateinterval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is obsolete.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
The address specified in the <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> option
is used for both UDP and TCP queries, but the port applies only
to UDP queries. TCP queries always use a random
unprivileged port.
</p>
</div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the source
address for TCP sockets.
</p>
</div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
See also <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="zone_transfers"></a>Zone Transfers</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> has mechanisms in place to
facilitate zone transfers
and set limits on the amount of load that transfers place on the
system. The following options apply to zone transfers.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers
that are also sent NOTIFY messages whenever a fresh copy of
the
zone is loaded, in addition to the servers listed in the
zone's NS records.
This helps to ensure that copies of the zones will
quickly converge on stealth servers.
Optionally, a port may be specified with each
<span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> address to send
the notify messages to a port other than the
default of 53.
If an <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> list
is given in a <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement,
it will override
the <span><strong class="command">options also-notify</strong></span>
statement. When a <span><strong class="command">zone notify</strong></span>
statement
is set to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>, the IP
addresses in the global <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> list will
not be sent NOTIFY messages for that zone. The default is
the empty
list (no global notification list).
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Inbound zone transfers running longer than
this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120
minutes
(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Inbound zone transfers making no progress
in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60
minutes
(1 hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Outbound zone transfers running longer than
this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120
minutes
(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Outbound zone transfers making no progress
in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60
minutes (1
hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Slave servers will periodically query master
servers to find out if zone serial numbers have
changed. Each such query uses a minute amount of
the slave server's network bandwidth. To limit
the amount of bandwidth used, BIND 9 limits the
rate at which queries are sent. The value of the
<span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span> option, an
integer, is the maximum number of queries sent
per second. The default is 20.
</p>
<p>
In addition to controlling the rate SOA refresh
queries are issued at
<span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span> also controls
the rate at which NOTIFY messages are sent from
both master and slave zones.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">serial-queries</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
In BIND 8, the <span><strong class="command">serial-queries</strong></span>
option
set the maximum number of concurrent serial number queries
allowed to be outstanding at any given time.
BIND 9 does not limit the number of outstanding
serial queries and ignores the <span><strong class="command">serial-queries</strong></span> option.
Instead, it limits the rate at which the queries are sent
as defined using the <span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span> option.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
<span><strong class="command">one-answer</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span>.
The <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> option is used
on the master server to determine which format it sends.
<span><strong class="command">one-answer</strong></span> uses one DNS message per
resource record transferred.
<span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> packs as many resource
records as possible into a message.
<span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> is more efficient, but is
only supported by relatively new slave servers,
such as <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
8.x and <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4.9.5 onwards.
The <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> format is also supported by
recent Microsoft Windows nameservers.
The default is <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span>.
<span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> may be overridden on a
per-server basis by using the <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span>
statement.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfers-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
that can be running concurrently. The default value is <code class="literal">10</code>.
Increasing <span><strong class="command">transfers-in</strong></span> may
speed up the convergence
of slave zones, but it also may increase the load on the
local system.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfers-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum number of outbound zone transfers
that can be running concurrently. Zone transfer requests in
excess
of the limit will be refused. The default value is <code class="literal">10</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
that can be concurrently transferring from a given remote
name server.
The default value is <code class="literal">2</code>.
Increasing <span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span>
may
speed up the convergence of slave zones, but it also may
increase
the load on the remote name server. <span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span> may
be overridden on a per-server basis by using the <span><strong class="command">transfers</strong></span> phrase
of the <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statement.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p><span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span>
determines which local address will be bound to IPv4
TCP connections used to fetch zones transferred
inbound by the server. It also determines the
source IPv4 address, and optionally the UDP port,
used for the refresh queries and forwarded dynamic
updates. If not set, it defaults to a system
controlled value which will usually be the address
of the interface "closest to" the remote end. This
address must appear in the remote end's
<span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span> option for the
zone being transferred, if one is specified. This
statement sets the
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> for all zones,
but can be overridden on a per-view or per-zone
basis by including a
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> statement within
the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> block in the configuration
file.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the
source address for TCP sockets.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The same as <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span>,
except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> fails and
<span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span> is
set.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
If you do not wish the alternate transfer source
to be used, you should set
<span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span>
appropriately and you should not depend upon
getting an answer back to the first refresh
query.
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> fails and
<span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span> is
set.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Use the alternate transfer sources or not. If views are
specified this defaults to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>
otherwise it defaults to
<span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span> (for BIND 8
compatibility).
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p><span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>
determines which local source address, and
optionally UDP port, will be used to send NOTIFY
messages. This address must appear in the slave
server's <span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> zone clause or
in an <span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span> clause. This
statement sets the <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>
for all zones, but can be overridden on a per-zone or
per-view basis by including a
<span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span> statement within
the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> block in the configuration
file.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
Solaris 2.5.1 and earlier does not support setting the
source address for TCP sockets.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Like <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>,
but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6 addresses.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2585531"></a>UDP Port Lists</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span>, and
<span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span>
specify a list of IPv4 and IPv6 UDP ports that will be
used or not used as source ports for UDP messages.
See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#query_address" title="Query Address">the section called “Query Address”</a> about how the
available ports are determined.
For example, with the following configuration
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
use-v6-udp-ports { range 32768 65535; };
avoid-v6-udp-ports { 40000; range 50000 60000; };
</pre>
<p>
UDP ports of IPv6 messages sent
from <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will be in one
of the following ranges: 32768 to 39999, 40001 to 49999,
and 60001 to 65535.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">avoid-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">avoid-v6-udp-ports</strong></span> can be used
to prevent <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> from choosing as its random source port a
port that is blocked by your firewall or a port that is
used by other applications;
if a query went out with a source port blocked by a
firewall, the
answer would not get by the firewall and the name server would
have to query again.
Note: the desired range can also be represented only with
<span><strong class="command">use-v4-udp-ports</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">use-v6-udp-ports</strong></span>, and the
<span><strong class="command">avoid-</strong></span> options are redundant in that
sense; they are provided for backward compatibility and
to possibly simplify the port specification.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2585591"></a>Operating System Resource Limits</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The server's usage of many system resources can be limited.
Scaled values are allowed when specifying resource limits. For
example, <span><strong class="command">1G</strong></span> can be used instead of
<span><strong class="command">1073741824</strong></span> to specify a limit of
one
gigabyte. <span><strong class="command">unlimited</strong></span> requests
unlimited use, or the
maximum available amount. <span><strong class="command">default</strong></span>
uses the limit
that was in force when the server was started. See the description
of <span><strong class="command">size_spec</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#configuration_file_elements" title="Configuration File Elements">the section called “Configuration File Elements”</a>.
</p>
<p>
The following options set operating system resource limits for
the name server process. Some operating systems don't support
some or
any of the limits. On such systems, a warning will be issued if
the
unsupported limit is used.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">coresize</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum size of a core dump. The default
is <code class="literal">default</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">datasize</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum amount of data memory the server
may use. The default is <code class="literal">default</code>.
This is a hard limit on server memory usage.
If the server attempts to allocate memory in excess of this
limit, the allocation will fail, which may in turn leave
the server unable to perform DNS service. Therefore,
this option is rarely useful as a way of limiting the
amount of memory used by the server, but it can be used
to raise an operating system data size limit that is
too small by default. If you wish to limit the amount
of memory used by the server, use the
<span><strong class="command">max-cache-size</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span>
options instead.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">files</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum number of files the server
may have open concurrently. The default is <code class="literal">unlimited</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">stacksize</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum amount of stack memory the server
may use. The default is <code class="literal">default</code>.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="server_resource_limits"></a>Server Resource Limits</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The following options set limits on the server's
resource consumption that are enforced internally by the
server rather than the operating system.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-ixfr-log-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is obsolete; it is accepted
and ignored for BIND 8 compatibility. The option
<span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span> performs a
similar function in BIND 9.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Sets a maximum size for each journal file
(see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#journal" title="The journal file">the section called “The journal file”</a>). When the journal file
approaches
the specified size, some of the oldest transactions in the
journal
will be automatically removed. The default is
<code class="literal">unlimited</code>.
This may also be set on a per-zone basis.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">host-statistics-max</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
In BIND 8, specifies the maximum number of host statistics
entries to be kept.
Not implemented in BIND 9.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum number of simultaneous recursive lookups
the server will perform on behalf of clients. The default
is
<code class="literal">1000</code>. Because each recursing
client uses a fair
bit of memory, on the order of 20 kilobytes, the value of
the
<span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span> option may
have to be decreased
on hosts with limited memory.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tcp-clients</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum number of simultaneous client TCP
connections that the server will accept.
The default is <code class="literal">100</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">reserved-sockets</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
The number of file descriptors reserved for TCP, stdio,
etc. This needs to be big enough to cover the number of
interfaces <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> listens on, <span><strong class="command">tcp-clients</strong></span> as well as
to provide room for outgoing TCP queries and incoming zone
transfers. The default is <code class="literal">512</code>.
The minimum value is <code class="literal">128</code> and the
maximum value is <code class="literal">128</code> less than
maxsockets (-S). This option may be removed in the future.
</p>
<p>
This option has little effect on Windows.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-cache-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum amount of memory to use for the
server's cache, in bytes.
When the amount of data in the cache
reaches this limit, the server will cause records to expire
prematurely based on an LRU based strategy so that
the limit is not exceeded.
A value of 0 is special, meaning that
records are purged from the cache only when their
TTLs expire.
Another special keyword <strong class="userinput"><code>unlimited</code></strong>
means the maximum value of 32-bit unsigned integers
(0xffffffff), which may not have the same effect as
0 on machines that support more than 32 bits of
memory space.
Any positive values less than 2MB will be ignored reset
to 2MB.
In a server with multiple views, the limit applies
separately to the cache of each view.
The default is 0.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">tcp-listen-queue</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The listen queue depth. The default and minimum is 3.
If the kernel supports the accept filter "dataready" this
also controls how
many TCP connections that will be queued in kernel space
waiting for
some data before being passed to accept. Values less than 3
will be
silently raised.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2586082"></a>Periodic Task Intervals</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">cleaning-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This interval is effectively obsolete. Previously,
the server would remove expired resource records
from the cache every <span><strong class="command">cleaning-interval</strong></span> minutes.
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 now manages cache
memory in a more sophisticated manner and does not
rely on the periodic cleaning any more.
Specifying this option therefore has no effect on
the server's behavior.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">heartbeat-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The server will perform zone maintenance tasks
for all zones marked as <span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span> whenever this
interval expires. The default is 60 minutes. Reasonable
values are up
to 1 day (1440 minutes). The maximum value is 28 days
(40320 minutes).
If set to 0, no zone maintenance for these zones will occur.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">interface-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The server will scan the network interface list
every <span><strong class="command">interface-interval</strong></span>
minutes. The default
is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
If set to 0, interface scanning will only occur when
the configuration file is loaded. After the scan, the
server will
begin listening for queries on any newly discovered
interfaces (provided they are allowed by the
<span><strong class="command">listen-on</strong></span> configuration), and
will
stop listening on interfaces that have gone away.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">statistics-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Name server statistics will be logged
every <span><strong class="command">statistics-interval</strong></span>
minutes. The default is
60. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
If set to 0, no statistics will be logged.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
Not yet implemented in
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="topology"></a>Topology</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
All other things being equal, when the server chooses a name
server
to query from a list of name servers, it prefers the one that is
topologically closest to itself. The <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span> statement
takes an <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> and
interprets it
in a special way. Each top-level list element is assigned a
distance.
Non-negated elements get a distance based on their position in the
list, where the closer the match is to the start of the list, the
shorter the distance is between it and the server. A negated match
will be assigned the maximum distance from the server. If there
is no match, the address will get a distance which is further than
any non-negated list element, and closer than any negated element.
For example,
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">topology {
10/8;
!1.2.3/24;
{ 1.2/16; 3/8; };
};</pre>
<p>
will prefer servers on network 10 the most, followed by hosts
on network 1.2.0.0 (netmask 255.255.0.0) and network 3, with the
exception of hosts on network 1.2.3 (netmask 255.255.255.0), which
is preferred least of all.
</p>
<p>
The default topology is
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"> topology { localhost; localnets; };
</pre>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span> option
is not implemented in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="the_sortlist_statement"></a>The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> Statement</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource
records (RRs) forming a resource records set (RRset).
The name server will normally return the
RRs within the RRset in an indeterminate order
(but see the <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span>
statement in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#rrset_ordering" title="RRset Ordering">the section called “RRset Ordering”</a>).
The client resolver code should rearrange the RRs as appropriate,
that is, using any addresses on the local net in preference to
other addresses.
However, not all resolvers can do this or are correctly
configured.
When a client is using a local server, the sorting can be performed
in the server, based on the client's address. This only requires
configuring the name servers, not all the clients.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> statement (see below)
takes
an <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> and
interprets it even
more specifically than the <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span>
statement
does (<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#topology" title="Topology">the section called “Topology”</a>).
Each top level statement in the <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> must
itself be an explicit <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> with
one or two elements. The first element (which may be an IP
address,
an IP prefix, an ACL name or a nested <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>)
of each top level list is checked against the source address of
the query until a match is found.
</p>
<p>
Once the source address of the query has been matched, if
the top level statement contains only one element, the actual
primitive
element that matched the source address is used to select the
address
in the response to move to the beginning of the response. If the
statement is a list of two elements, then the second element is
treated the same as the <span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span> in
a <span><strong class="command">topology</strong></span> statement. Each top
level element
is assigned a distance and the address in the response with the
minimum
distance is moved to the beginning of the response.
</p>
<p>
In the following example, any queries received from any of
the addresses of the host itself will get responses preferring
addresses
on any of the locally connected networks. Next most preferred are
addresses
on the 192.168.1/24 network, and after that either the
192.168.2/24
or
192.168.3/24 network with no preference shown between these two
networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.1/24 network
will prefer other addresses on that network to the 192.168.2/24
and
192.168.3/24 networks. Queries received from a host on the
192.168.4/24
or the 192.168.5/24 network will only prefer other addresses on
their directly connected networks.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">sortlist {
// IF the local host
// THEN first fit on the following nets
{ localhost;
{ localnets;
192.168.1/24;
{ 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
// IF on class C 192.168.1 THEN use .1, or .2 or .3
{ 192.168.1/24;
{ 192.168.1/24;
{ 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
// IF on class C 192.168.2 THEN use .2, or .1 or .3
{ 192.168.2/24;
{ 192.168.2/24;
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
// IF on class C 192.168.3 THEN use .3, or .1 or .2
{ 192.168.3/24;
{ 192.168.3/24;
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.2/24; }; }; };
// IF .4 or .5 THEN prefer that net
{ { 192.168.4/24; 192.168.5/24; };
};
};</pre>
<p>
The following example will give reasonable behavior for the
local host and hosts on directly connected networks. It is similar
to the behavior of the address sort in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4.9.x. Responses sent
to queries from the local host will favor any of the directly
connected
networks. Responses sent to queries from any other hosts on a
directly
connected network will prefer addresses on that same network.
Responses
to other queries will not be sorted.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">sortlist {
{ localhost; localnets; };
{ localnets; };
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="rrset_ordering"></a>RRset Ordering</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
When multiple records are returned in an answer it may be
useful to configure the order of the records placed into the
response.
The <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span> statement permits
configuration
of the ordering of the records in a multiple record response.
See also the <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> statement,
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#the_sortlist_statement" title="The sortlist Statement">the section called “The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> Statement”</a>.
</p>
<p>
An <span><strong class="command">order_spec</strong></span> is defined as
follows:
</p>
<p>
[<span class="optional">class <em class="replaceable"><code>class_name</code></em></span>]
[<span class="optional">type <em class="replaceable"><code>type_name</code></em></span>]
[<span class="optional">name <em class="replaceable"><code>"domain_name"</code></em></span>]
order <em class="replaceable"><code>ordering</code></em>
</p>
<p>
If no class is specified, the default is <span><strong class="command">ANY</strong></span>.
If no type is specified, the default is <span><strong class="command">ANY</strong></span>.
If no name is specified, the default is "<span><strong class="command">*</strong></span>" (asterisk).
</p>
<p>
The legal values for <span><strong class="command">ordering</strong></span> are:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">fixed</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Records are returned in the order they
are defined in the zone file.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">random</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Records are returned in some random order.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">cyclic</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Records are returned in a cyclic round-robin order.
</p>
<p>
If <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> is configured with the
"--enable-fixed-rrset" option at compile time, then
the initial ordering of the RRset will match the
one specified in the zone file.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
For example:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">rrset-order {
class IN type A name "host.example.com" order random;
order cyclic;
};
</pre>
<p>
will cause any responses for type A records in class IN that
have "<code class="literal">host.example.com</code>" as a
suffix, to always be returned
in random order. All other records are returned in cyclic order.
</p>
<p>
If multiple <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span> statements
appear,
they are not combined — the last one applies.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
In this release of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, the
<span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span> statement does not support
"fixed" ordering by default. Fixed ordering can be enabled
at compile time by specifying "--enable-fixed-rrset" on
the "configure" command line.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="tuning"></a>Tuning</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">lame-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Sets the number of seconds to cache a
lame server indication. 0 disables caching. (This is
<span class="bold"><strong>NOT</strong></span> recommended.)
The default is <code class="literal">600</code> (10 minutes) and the
maximum value is
<code class="literal">1800</code> (30 minutes).
</p>
<p>
Lame-ttl also controls the amount of time DNSSEC
validation failures are cached. There is a minimum
of 30 seconds applied to bad cache entries if the
lame-ttl is set to less than 30 seconds.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
To reduce network traffic and increase performance,
the server stores negative answers. <span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span> is
used to set a maximum retention time for these answers in
the server
in seconds. The default
<span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span> is <code class="literal">10800</code> seconds (3 hours).
<span><strong class="command">max-ncache-ttl</strong></span> cannot exceed
7 days and will
be silently truncated to 7 days if set to a greater value.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-cache-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Sets the maximum time for which the server will
cache ordinary (positive) answers. The default is
one week (7 days).
A value of zero may cause all queries to return
SERVFAIL, because of lost caches of intermediate
RRsets (such as NS and glue AAAA/A records) in the
resolution process.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-roots</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
The minimum number of root servers that
is required for a request for the root servers to be
accepted. The default
is <strong class="userinput"><code>2</code></strong>.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
Not implemented in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</div>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Specifies the number of days into the future when
DNSSEC signatures automatically generated as a
result of dynamic updates (<a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#dynamic_update" title="Dynamic Update">the section called “Dynamic Update”</a>) will expire. There
is an optional second field which specifies how
long before expiry that the signatures will be
regenerated. If not specified, the signatures will
be regenerated at 1/4 of base interval. The second
field is specified in days if the base interval is
greater than 7 days otherwise it is specified in hours.
The default base interval is <code class="literal">30</code> days
giving a re-signing interval of 7 1/2 days. The maximum
values are 10 years (3660 days).
</p>
<p>
The signature inception time is unconditionally
set to one hour before the current time to allow
for a limited amount of clock skew.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span>
should be, at least, several multiples of the SOA
expire interval to allow for reasonable interaction
between the various timer and expiry dates.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-nodes</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specify the maximum number of nodes to be
examined in each quantum when signing a zone with
a new DNSKEY. The default is
<code class="literal">100</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-signatures</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specify a threshold number of signatures that
will terminate processing a quantum when signing
a zone with a new DNSKEY. The default is
<code class="literal">10</code>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-type</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Specify a private RDATA type to be used when generating
key signing records. The default is
<code class="literal">65534</code>.
</p>
<p>
It is expected that this parameter may be removed
in a future version once there is a standard type.
</p>
</dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-retry-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-retry-time</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>
These options control the server's behavior on refreshing a
zone
(querying for SOA changes) or retrying failed transfers.
Usually the SOA values for the zone are used, but these
values
are set by the master, giving slave server administrators
little
control over their contents.
</p>
<p>
These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and
maximum
refresh and retry time either per-zone, per-view, or
globally.
These options are valid for slave and stub zones,
and clamp the SOA refresh and retry times to the specified
values.
</p>
<p>
The following defaults apply.
<span><strong class="command">min-refresh-time</strong></span> 300 seconds,
<span><strong class="command">max-refresh-time</strong></span> 2419200 seconds
(4 weeks), <span><strong class="command">min-retry-time</strong></span> 500 seconds,
and <span><strong class="command">max-retry-time</strong></span> 1209600 seconds
(2 weeks).
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Sets the advertised EDNS UDP buffer size in bytes
to control the size of packets received.
Valid values are 512 to 4096 (values outside this range
will be silently adjusted). The default value
is 4096. The usual reason for setting
<span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span> to a non-default
value is to get UDP answers to pass through broken
firewalls that block fragmented packets and/or
block UDP packets that are greater than 512 bytes.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will fallback to using 512 bytes
if it get a series of timeout at the initial value. 512
bytes is not being offered to encourage sites to fix their
firewalls. Small EDNS UDP sizes will result in the
excessive use of TCP.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-udp-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Sets the maximum EDNS UDP message size
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will send in bytes.
Valid values are 512 to 4096 (values outside this
range will be silently adjusted). The default
value is 4096. The usual reason for setting
<span><strong class="command">max-udp-size</strong></span> to a non-default
value is to get UDP answers to pass through broken
firewalls that block fragmented packets and/or
block UDP packets that are greater than 512 bytes.
This is independent of the advertised receive
buffer (<span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span>).
</p>
<p>
Setting this to a low value will encourage additional
TCP traffic to the nameserver.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>Specifies
the file format of zone files (see
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zonefile_format" title="Additional File Formats">the section called “Additional File Formats”</a>).
The default value is <code class="constant">text</code>, which is the
standard textual representation. Files in other formats
than <code class="constant">text</code> are typically expected
to be generated by the <span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> tool.
Note that when a zone file in a different format than
<code class="constant">text</code> is loaded, <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
may omit some of the checks which would be performed for a
file in the <code class="constant">text</code> format. In particular,
<span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span> checks do not apply
for the <code class="constant">raw</code> format. This means
a zone file in the <code class="constant">raw</code> format
must be generated with the same check level as that
specified in the <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> configuration
file. This statement sets the
<span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span> for all zones,
but can be overridden on a per-zone or per-view basis
by including a <span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span>
statement within the <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> or
<span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> block in the configuration
file.
</p></dd>
<dt>
<a name="clients-per-query"></a><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">clients-per-query</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-clients-per-query</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd>
<p>These set the
initial value (minimum) and maximum number of recursive
simultaneous clients for any given query
(<qname,qtype,qclass>) that the server will accept
before dropping additional clients. <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will attempt to
self tune this value and changes will be logged. The
default values are 10 and 100.
</p>
<p>
This value should reflect how many queries come in for
a given name in the time it takes to resolve that name.
If the number of queries exceed this value, <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will
assume that it is dealing with a non-responsive zone
and will drop additional queries. If it gets a response
after dropping queries, it will raise the estimate. The
estimate will then be lowered in 20 minutes if it has
remained unchanged.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">clients-per-query</strong></span> is set to zero,
then there is no limit on the number of clients per query
and no queries will be dropped.
</p>
<p>
If <span><strong class="command">max-clients-per-query</strong></span> is set to zero,
then there is no upper bound other than imposed by
<span><strong class="command">recursive-clients</strong></span>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-delay</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
The delay, in seconds, between sending sets of notify
messages for a zone. The default is five (5) seconds.
</p>
<p>
The overall rate that NOTIFY messages are sent for all
zones is controlled by <span><strong class="command">serial-query-rate</strong></span>.
</p>
</dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="builtin"></a>Built-in server information zones</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The server provides some helpful diagnostic information
through a number of built-in zones under the
pseudo-top-level-domain <code class="literal">bind</code> in the
<span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span> class. These zones are part
of a
built-in view (see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#view_statement_grammar" title="view Statement Grammar">the section called “<span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Grammar”</a>) of
class
<span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span> which is separate from the
default view of
class <span><strong class="command">IN</strong></span>; therefore, any global
server options
such as <span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span> do not apply
the these zones.
If you feel the need to disable these zones, use the options
below, or hide the built-in <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>
view by
defining an explicit view of class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>
that matches all clients.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">version</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The version the server should report
via a query of the name <code class="literal">version.bind</code>
with type <span><strong class="command">TXT</strong></span>, class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>.
The default is the real version number of this server.
Specifying <span><strong class="command">version none</strong></span>
disables processing of the queries.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">hostname</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The hostname the server should report via a query of
the name <code class="filename">hostname.bind</code>
with type <span><strong class="command">TXT</strong></span>, class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>.
This defaults to the hostname of the machine hosting the
name server as
found by the gethostname() function. The primary purpose of such queries
is to
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
answering your queries. Specifying <span><strong class="command">hostname none;</strong></span>
disables processing of the queries.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">server-id</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The ID the server should report when receiving a Name
Server Identifier (NSID) query, or a query of the name
<code class="filename">ID.SERVER</code> with type
<span><strong class="command">TXT</strong></span>, class <span><strong class="command">CHAOS</strong></span>.
The primary purpose of such queries is to
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
answering your queries. Specifying <span><strong class="command">server-id none;</strong></span>
disables processing of the queries.
Specifying <span><strong class="command">server-id hostname;</strong></span> will cause <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to
use the hostname as found by the gethostname() function.
The default <span><strong class="command">server-id</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">none</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="empty"></a>Built-in Empty Zones</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Named has some built-in empty zones (SOA and NS records only).
These are for zones that should normally be answered locally
and which queries should not be sent to the Internet's root
servers. The official servers which cover these namespaces
return NXDOMAIN responses to these queries. In particular,
these cover the reverse namespaces for addresses from
RFC 1918, RFC 4193, and RFC 5737. They also include the
reverse namespace for IPv6 local address (locally assigned),
IPv6 link local addresses, the IPv6 loopback address and the
IPv6 unknown address.
</p>
<p>
Named will attempt to determine if a built-in zone already exists
or is active (covered by a forward-only forwarding declaration)
and will not create an empty zone in that case.
</p>
<p>
The current list of empty zones is:
</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>10.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>16.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>17.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>18.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>19.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>20.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>21.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>22.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>23.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>24.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>25.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>26.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>27.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>28.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>29.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>30.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>31.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>168.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>0.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>127.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>254.169.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>2.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>100.51.198.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>113.0.203.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>255.255.255.255.IN-ADDR.ARPA</li>
<li>0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>8.B.D.0.1.0.0.2.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>D.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>8.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>9.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>A.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
<li>B.E.F.IP6.ARPA</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
</p>
<p>
Empty zones are settable at the view level and only apply to
views of class IN. Disabled empty zones are only inherited
from options if there are no disabled empty zones specified
at the view level. To override the options list of disabled
zones, you can disable the root zone at the view level, for example:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
disable-empty-zone ".";
</pre>
<p>
</p>
<p>
If you are using the address ranges covered here, you should
already have reverse zones covering the addresses you use.
In practice this appears to not be the case with many queries
being made to the infrastructure servers for names in these
spaces. So many in fact that sacrificial servers were needed
to be deployed to channel the query load away from the
infrastructure servers.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
The real parent servers for these zones should disable all
empty zone under the parent zone they serve. For the real
root servers, this is all built-in empty zones. This will
enable them to return referrals to deeper in the tree.
</div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">empty-server</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specify what server name will appear in the returned
SOA record for empty zones. If none is specified, then
the zone's name will be used.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">empty-contact</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specify what contact name will appear in the returned
SOA record for empty zones. If none is specified, then
"." will be used.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">empty-zones-enable</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Enable or disable all empty zones. By default, they
are enabled.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">disable-empty-zone</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Disable individual empty zones. By default, none are
disabled. This option can be specified multiple times.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="acache"></a>Additional Section Caching</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The additional section cache, also called <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>,
is an internal cache to improve the response performance of BIND 9.
When additional section caching is enabled, BIND 9 will
cache an internal short-cut to the additional section content for
each answer RR.
Note that <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span> is an internal caching
mechanism of BIND 9, and is not related to the DNS caching
server function.
</p>
<p>
Additional section caching does not change the
response content (except the RRsets ordering of the additional
section, see below), but can improve the response performance
significantly.
It is particularly effective when BIND 9 acts as an authoritative
server for a zone that has many delegations with many glue RRs.
</p>
<p>
In order to obtain the maximum performance improvement
from additional section caching, setting
<span><strong class="command">additional-from-cache</strong></span>
to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span> is recommended, since the current
implementation of <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>
does not short-cut of additional section information from the
DNS cache data.
</p>
<p>
One obvious disadvantage of <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span> is
that it requires much more
memory for the internal cached data.
Thus, if the response performance does not matter and memory
consumption is much more critical, the
<span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span> mechanism can be
disabled by setting <span><strong class="command">acache-enable</strong></span> to
<span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
It is also possible to specify the upper limit of memory
consumption
for acache by using <span><strong class="command">max-acache-size</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
Additional section caching also has a minor effect on the
RRset ordering in the additional section.
Without <span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">cyclic</strong></span> order is effective for the additional
section as well as the answer and authority sections.
However, additional section caching fixes the ordering when it
first caches an RRset for the additional section, and the same
ordering will be kept in succeeding responses, regardless of the
setting of <span><strong class="command">rrset-order</strong></span>.
The effect of this should be minor, however, since an
RRset in the additional section
typically only contains a small number of RRs (and in many cases
it only contains a single RR), in which case the
ordering does not matter much.
</p>
<p>
The following is a summary of options related to
<span><strong class="command">acache</strong></span>.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">acache-enable</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>, additional section caching is
enabled. The default value is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">acache-cleaning-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The server will remove stale cache entries, based on an LRU
based
algorithm, every <span><strong class="command">acache-cleaning-interval</strong></span> minutes.
The default is 60 minutes.
If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-acache-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
The maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for the server's acache.
When the amount of data in the acache reaches this limit,
the server
will clean more aggressively so that the limit is not
exceeded.
In a server with multiple views, the limit applies
separately to the
acache of each view.
The default is <code class="literal">16M</code>.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2588188"></a>Content Filtering</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 provides the ability to filter
out DNS responses from external DNS servers containing
certain types of data in the answer section.
Specifically, it can reject address (A or AAAA) records if
the corresponding IPv4 or IPv6 addresses match the given
<code class="varname">address_match_list</code> of the
<span><strong class="command">deny-answer-addresses</strong></span> option.
It can also reject CNAME or DNAME records if the "alias"
name (i.e., the CNAME alias or the substituted query name
due to DNAME) matches the
given <code class="varname">namelist</code> of the
<span><strong class="command">deny-answer-aliases</strong></span> option, where
"match" means the alias name is a subdomain of one of
the <code class="varname">name_list</code> elements.
If the optional <code class="varname">namelist</code> is specified
with <span><strong class="command">except-from</strong></span>, records whose query name
matches the list will be accepted regardless of the filter
setting.
Likewise, if the alias name is a subdomain of the
corresponding zone, the <span><strong class="command">deny-answer-aliases</strong></span>
filter will not apply;
for example, even if "example.com" is specified for
<span><strong class="command">deny-answer-aliases</strong></span>,
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">www.example.com. CNAME xxx.example.com.</pre>
<p>
returned by an "example.com" server will be accepted.
</p>
<p>
In the <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> of the
<span><strong class="command">deny-answer-addresses</strong></span> option, only
<code class="varname">ip_addr</code>
and <code class="varname">ip_prefix</code>
are meaningful;
any <code class="varname">key_id</code> will be silently ignored.
</p>
<p>
If a response message is rejected due to the filtering,
the entire message is discarded without being cached, and
a SERVFAIL error will be returned to the client.
</p>
<p>
This filtering is intended to prevent "DNS rebinding attacks," in
which an attacker, in response to a query for a domain name the
attacker controls, returns an IP address within your own network or
an alias name within your own domain.
A naive web browser or script could then serve as an
unintended proxy, allowing the attacker
to get access to an internal node of your local network
that couldn't be externally accessed otherwise.
See the paper available at
<a href="" target="_top">
http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=1315245.1315298
</a>
for more details about the attacks.
</p>
<p>
For example, if you own a domain named "example.net" and
your internal network uses an IPv4 prefix 192.0.2.0/24,
you might specify the following rules:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">deny-answer-addresses { 192.0.2.0/24; } except-from { "example.net"; };
deny-answer-aliases { "example.net"; };
</pre>
<p>
If an external attacker lets a web browser in your local
network look up an IPv4 address of "attacker.example.com",
the attacker's DNS server would return a response like this:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">attacker.example.com. A 192.0.2.1</pre>
<p>
in the answer section.
Since the rdata of this record (the IPv4 address) matches
the specified prefix 192.0.2.0/24, this response will be
ignored.
</p>
<p>
On the other hand, if the browser looks up a legitimate
internal web server "www.example.net" and the
following response is returned to
the <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 server
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">www.example.net. A 192.0.2.2</pre>
<p>
it will be accepted since the owner name "www.example.net"
matches the <span><strong class="command">except-from</strong></span> element,
"example.net".
</p>
<p>
Note that this is not really an attack on the DNS per se.
In fact, there is nothing wrong for an "external" name to
be mapped to your "internal" IP address or domain name
from the DNS point of view.
It might actually be provided for a legitimate purpose,
such as for debugging.
As long as the mapping is provided by the correct owner,
it is not possible or does not make sense to detect
whether the intent of the mapping is legitimate or not
within the DNS.
The "rebinding" attack must primarily be protected at the
application that uses the DNS.
For a large site, however, it may be difficult to protect
all possible applications at once.
This filtering feature is provided only to help such an
operational environment;
it is generally discouraged to turn it on unless you are
very sure you have no other choice and the attack is a
real threat for your applications.
</p>
<p>
Care should be particularly taken if you want to use this
option for addresses within 127.0.0.0/8.
These addresses are obviously "internal", but many
applications conventionally rely on a DNS mapping from
some name to such an address.
Filtering out DNS records containing this address
spuriously can break such applications.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2588379"></a>Response Policy Zone (RPZ) Rewriting</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 includes an intentionally limited
mechanism to modify DNS responses for recursive requests
somewhat similar to email anti-spam DNS blacklists.
Responses can be changed to deny the existence of domains(NXDOMAIN),
deny the existence of IP addresses for domains (NODATA),
or contain other IP addresses or data.
</p>
<p>
The actions encoded in a response policy zone (RPZ) are applied
only to queries that ask for recursion (RD=1).
Response policy zones are named in the
<span><strong class="command">response-policy</strong></span> option for the view or among the
global options if there is no response-policy option for the view.
RPZs are ordinary DNS zones containing RRsets
that can be queried normally if allowed.
It is usually best to restrict those queries with something like
<span><strong class="command">allow-query { localhost; };</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
There are four kinds of RPZ records, QNAME, IP, NSIP,
and NSDNAME.
QNAME records are applied to query names of requests and targets
of CNAME records resolved to generate the response.
The owner name of a QNAME RPZ record is the query name relativized
to the RPZ.
</p>
<p>
The second kind of RPZ record, an IP policy record,
is triggered by addresses in A and AAAA records
for the ANSWER sections of responses.
IP policy records have owner names that are
subdomains of <strong class="userinput"><code>rpz-ip</code></strong> relativized to the
RPZ origin name and encode an IP address or address block.
IPv4 addresses are encoded as
<strong class="userinput"><code>prefixlength.B4.B3.B2.B1.rpz-ip</code></strong>.
The prefix length must be between 1 and 32.
All four bytes, B4, B3, B2, and B1, must be present.
B4 is the decimal value of the least significant byte of the
IPv4 address as in IN-ADDR.ARPA.
IPv6 addresses are encoded in a format similar to the standard
IPv6 text representation,
<strong class="userinput"><code>prefixlength.W8.W7.W6.W5.W4.W3.W2.W1.rpz-ip</code></strong>.
Each of W8,...,W1 is a one to four digit hexadecimal number
representing 16 bits of the IPv6 address as in the standard text
representation of IPv6 addresses, but reversed as in IN-ADDR.ARPA.
All 8 words must be present except when consecutive
zero words are replaced with <strong class="userinput"><code>.zz.</code></strong>
analogous to double colons (::) in standard IPv6 text encodings.
The prefix length must be between 1 and 128.
</p>
<p>
NSDNAME policy records match names of authoritative servers
for the query name, a parent of the query name, a CNAME,
or a parent of a CNAME.
They are encoded as subdomains of
<strong class="userinput"><code>rpz-nsdomain</code></strong> relativized
to the RPZ origin name.
</p>
<p>
NSIP policy records match IP addresses in A and AAAA RRsets
for domains that can be checked against NSDNAME policy records.
The are encoded like IP policies except as subdomains of
<strong class="userinput"><code>rpz-nsip</code></strong>.
</p>
<p>
The query response is checked against all RPZs, so
two or more policy records can apply to a single response.
Because DNS responses can be rewritten according by at most a
single policy record, a single policy (other than
<span><strong class="command">DISABLED</strong></span> policies) must be chosen.
Policies are chosen in the following order:
</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>Among applicable zones, use the RPZ that appears first
in the response-policy option.
</li>
<li>Prefer QNAME to IP to NSDNAME to NSIP policy records
in a single RPZ
</li>
<li>Among applicable NSDNAME policy records, prefer the
policy record that matches the lexically smallest name
</li>
<li>Among IP or NSIP policy records, prefer the record
with the longest prefix.
</li>
<li>Among records with the same prefex length,
prefer the IP or NSIP policy record that matches
the smallest IP address.
</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
</p>
<p>
When the processing of a response is restarted to resolve
DNAME or CNAME records and an applicable policy record set has
not been found,
all RPZs are again consulted for the DNAME or CNAME names
and addresses.
</p>
<p>
Authority verification issues and variations in authority data
can cause inconsistent results for NSIP and NSDNAME policy records.
Glue NS records often differ from authoritative NS records.
So they are available
only when <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> is built with the
<strong class="userinput"><code>--enable-rpz-nsip</code></strong> or
<strong class="userinput"><code>--enable-rpz-nsdname</code></strong> options
on the "configure" command line.
</p>
<p>
RPZ record sets are special CNAME records or one or more
of any types of DNS record except DNAME or DNSSEC.
Except when a policy record is a CNAME, there can be more
more than one record and more than one type
in a set of policy records.
Except for three kinds of CNAME records that are illegal except
in policy zones, the records in a set are used in the response as if
their owner name were the query name. They are copied to the
response as dictated by their types.
</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>A CNAME whose target is the root domain (.)
specifies the <span><strong class="command">NXDOMAIN</strong></span> policy,
which generates an NXDOMAIN response.
</li>
<li>A CNAME whose target is the wildcard top-level
domain (*.) specifies the <span><strong class="command">NODATA</strong></span> policy,
which rewrites the response to NODATA or ANCOUNT=1.
</li>
<li>A CNAME whose target is a wildcard hostname such
as *.example.com is used normally after the astrisk (*)
has been replaced with the query name.
These records are usually resolved with ordinary CNAMEs
outside the policy zones. They can be useful for logging.
</li>
<li>The <span><strong class="command">PASSTHRU</strong></span> policy is specified
by a CNAME whose target is the variable part of its own
owner name. It causes the response to not be rewritten
and is most often used to "poke holes" in policies for
CIDR blocks.
</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
</p>
<p>
The policies specified in individual records
in an RPZ can be overridden with a <span><strong class="command">policy</strong></span> clause
in the <span><strong class="command">response-policy</strong></span> option.
An organization using an RPZ provided by another organization might
use this mechanism to redirect domains to its own walled garden.
</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li>
<span><strong class="command">GIVEN</strong></span> says "do not override."
</li>
<li>
<span><strong class="command">DISABLED</strong></span> causes policy records to do
nothing but log what they might have done.
The response to the DNS query will be written according to
any matching policy records that are not disabled.
Policy zones overridden with <span><strong class="command">DISABLED</strong></span> should
appear first, because they will often not be logged
if a higher precedence policy is found first.
</li>
<li>
<span><strong class="command">PASSTHRU</strong></span> causes all policy records
to act as if they were CNAME records with targets the variable
part of their owner name. They protect the response from
being changed.
</li>
<li>
<span><strong class="command">NXDOMAIN</strong></span> causes all RPZ records
to specify NXDOMAIN policies.
</li>
<li>
<span><strong class="command">NODATA</strong></span> overrides with the
NODATA policy
</li>
<li>
<span><strong class="command">CNAME domain</strong></span> causes all RPZ
policy records to act as if they were "cname domain" records.
</li>
</ul></div>
<p>
</p>
<p>
For example, you might use this option statement
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"> response-policy { zone "badlist"; };</pre>
<p>
and this zone statement
</p>
<pre class="programlisting"> zone "badlist" {type master; file "master/badlist"; allow-query {none;}; };</pre>
<p>
with this zone file
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">$TTL 1H
@ SOA LOCALHOST. named-mgr.example.com (1 1h 15m 30d 2h)
NS LOCALHOST.
; QNAME policy records. There are no periods (.) after the owner names.
nxdomain.domain.com CNAME . ; NXDOMAIN policy
nodata.domain.com CNAME *. ; NODATA policy
bad.domain.com A 10.0.0.1 ; redirect to a walled garden
AAAA 2001:2::1
; do not rewrite (PASSTHRU) OK.DOMAIN.COM
ok.domain.com CNAME ok.domain.com.
bzone.domain.com CNAME garden.example.com.
; redirect x.bzone.domain.com to x.bzone.domain.com.garden.example.com
*.bzone.domain.com CNAME *.garden.example.com.
; IP policy records that rewrite all answers for 127/8 except 127.0.0.1
8.0.0.0.127.rpz-ip CNAME .
32.1.0.0.127.rpz-ip CNAME 32.1.0.0.127. ; PASSTHRU for 127.0.0.1
; NSDNAME and NSIP policy records
ns.domain.com.rpz-nsdname CNAME .
48.zz.2.2001.rpz-nsip CNAME .
</pre>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="server_statement_grammar"></a><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr[/prefixlen]</code></em> {
[<span class="optional"> bogus <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> provide-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> request-ixfr <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> edns <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> edns-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-udp-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfers <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-format <em class="replaceable"><code>( one-answer | many-answers )</code></em> ; ]</span>]
[<span class="optional"> keys <em class="replaceable"><code>{ string ; [<span class="optional"> string ; [<span class="optional">...</span>]</span>] }</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> query-source [<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]
[<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> query-source-v6 [<span class="optional"> address ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]
[<span class="optional"> port ( <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>*</code></em> ) </span>]; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-queryport-pool <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-ports <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> queryport-pool-updateinterval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em>; </span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="server_statement_definition_and_usage"></a><span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statement defines
characteristics
to be associated with a remote name server. If a prefix length is
specified, then a range of servers is covered. Only the most
specific
server clause applies regardless of the order in
<code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statement can occur at
the top level of the
configuration file or inside a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
statement.
If a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement contains
one or more <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statements, only
those
apply to the view and any top-level ones are ignored.
If a view contains no <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span>
statements,
any top-level <span><strong class="command">server</strong></span> statements are
used as
defaults.
</p>
<p>
If you discover that a remote server is giving out bad data,
marking it as bogus will prevent further queries to it. The
default
value of <span><strong class="command">bogus</strong></span> is <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> clause determines
whether
the local server, acting as master, will respond with an
incremental
zone transfer when the given remote server, a slave, requests it.
If set to <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>, incremental transfer
will be provided
whenever possible. If set to <span><strong class="command">no</strong></span>,
all transfers
to the remote server will be non-incremental. If not set, the
value
of the <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> option in the
view or
global options block is used as a default.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> clause determines
whether
the local server, acting as a slave, will request incremental zone
transfers from the given remote server, a master. If not set, the
value of the <span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> option in
the view or
global options block is used as a default.
</p>
<p>
IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR will
automatically
fall back to AXFR. Therefore, there is no need to manually list
which servers support IXFR and which ones do not; the global
default
of <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span> should always work.
The purpose of the <span><strong class="command">provide-ixfr</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">request-ixfr</strong></span> clauses is
to make it possible to disable the use of IXFR even when both
master
and slave claim to support it, for example if one of the servers
is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is used.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">edns</strong></span> clause determines whether
the local server will attempt to use EDNS when communicating
with the remote server. The default is <span><strong class="command">yes</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">edns-udp-size</strong></span> option sets the EDNS UDP size
that is advertised by <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> when querying the remote server.
Valid values are 512 to 4096 bytes (values outside this range will be
silently adjusted). This option is useful when you wish to
advertises a different value to this server than the value you
advertise globally, for example, when there is a firewall at the
remote site that is blocking large replies.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">max-udp-size</strong></span> option sets the
maximum EDNS UDP message size <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will send. Valid
values are 512 to 4096 bytes (values outside this range will
be silently adjusted). This option is useful when you
know that there is a firewall that is blocking large
replies from <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first, <span><strong class="command">one-answer</strong></span>,
uses one DNS message per resource record transferred. <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> packs
as many resource records as possible into a message. <span><strong class="command">many-answers</strong></span> is
more efficient, but is only known to be understood by <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
8.x, and patched versions of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
4.9.5. You can specify which method
to use for a server with the <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> option.
If <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span> is not
specified, the <span><strong class="command">transfer-format</strong></span>
specified
by the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement will be
used.
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">transfers</strong></span>
is used to limit the number of concurrent inbound zone
transfers from the specified server. If no
<span><strong class="command">transfers</strong></span> clause is specified, the
limit is set according to the
<span><strong class="command">transfers-per-ns</strong></span> option.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> clause identifies a
<span><strong class="command">key_id</strong></span> defined by the <span><strong class="command">key</strong></span> statement,
to be used for transaction security (TSIG, <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#tsig" title="TSIG">the section called “TSIG”</a>)
when talking to the remote server.
When a request is sent to the remote server, a request signature
will be generated using the key specified here and appended to the
message. A request originating from the remote server is not
required
to be signed by this key.
</p>
<p>
Although the grammar of the <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span>
clause
allows for multiple keys, only a single key per server is
currently
supported.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> clauses specify
the IPv4 and IPv6 source
address to be used for zone transfer with the remote server,
respectively.
For an IPv4 remote server, only <span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> can
be specified.
Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> can be
specified.
For more details, see the description of
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> in
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span> clauses specify the
IPv4 and IPv6 source address to be used for notify
messages sent to remote servers, respectively. For an
IPv4 remote server, only <span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span>
can be specified. Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server,
only <span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span> can be specified.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> clauses specify the
IPv4 and IPv6 source address to be used for queries
sent to remote servers, respectively. For an IPv4
remote server, only <span><strong class="command">query-source</strong></span> can
be specified. Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server,
only <span><strong class="command">query-source-v6</strong></span> can be specified.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="statschannels"></a><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> {
[ inet ( ip_addr | * ) [ port ip_port ]
[ allow { <em class="replaceable"><code> address_match_list </code></em> } ]; ]
[ inet ...; ]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2589481"></a><span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement
declares communication channels to be used by system
administrators to get access to statistics information of
the name server.
</p>
<p>
This statement intends to be flexible to support multiple
communication protocols in the future, but currently only
HTTP access is supported.
It requires that BIND 9 be compiled with libxml2;
the <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement is
still accepted even if it is built without the library,
but any HTTP access will fail with an error.
</p>
<p>
An <span><strong class="command">inet</strong></span> control channel is a TCP socket
listening at the specified <span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span> on the
specified <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span>, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address. An <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">*</code> (asterisk) is
interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard address; connections will be
accepted on any of the system's IPv4 addresses.
To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
use an <span><strong class="command">ip_addr</strong></span> of <code class="literal">::</code>.
</p>
<p>
If no port is specified, port 80 is used for HTTP channels.
The asterisk "<code class="literal">*</code>" cannot be used for
<span><strong class="command">ip_port</strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
The attempt of opening a statistics channel is
restricted by the optional <span><strong class="command">allow</strong></span> clause.
Connections to the statistics channel are permitted based on the
<span><strong class="command">address_match_list</strong></span>.
If no <span><strong class="command">allow</strong></span> clause is present,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> accepts connection
attempts from any address; since the statistics may
contain sensitive internal information, it is highly
recommended to restrict the source of connection requests
appropriately.
</p>
<p>
If no <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement is present,
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> will not open any communication channels.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="trusted-keys"></a><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> {
<em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; [<span class="optional">...</span>]</span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2589689"></a><span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> Statement Definition
and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> statement defines
DNSSEC security roots. DNSSEC is described in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch04.html#DNSSEC" title="DNSSEC">the section called “DNSSEC”</a>. A security root is defined when the
public key for a non-authoritative zone is known, but
cannot be securely obtained through DNS, either because
it is the DNS root zone or because its parent zone is
unsigned. Once a key has been configured as a trusted
key, it is treated as if it had been validated and
proven secure. The resolver attempts DNSSEC validation
on all DNS data in subdomains of a security root.
</p>
<p>
All keys (and corresponding zones) listed in
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> are deemed to exist regardless
of what parent zones say. Similarly for all keys listed in
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> only those keys are
used to validate the DNSKEY RRset. The parent's DS RRset
will not be used.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> statement can contain
multiple key entries, each consisting of the key's
domain name, flags, protocol, algorithm, and the Base-64
representation of the key data.
Spaces, tabs, newlines and carriage returns are ignored
in the key data, so the configuration may be split up into
multiple lines.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> may be set at the top level
of <code class="filename">named.conf</code> or within a view. If it is
set in both places, they are additive: keys defined at the top
level are inherited by all views, but keys defined in a view
are only used within that view.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2589736"></a><span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> {
<em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> initial-key <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> initial-key <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; [<span class="optional">...</span>]</span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="managed-keys"></a><span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> Statement Definition
and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement, like
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span>, defines DNSSEC
security roots. The difference is that
<span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> can be kept up to date
automatically, without intervention from the resolver
operator.
</p>
<p>
Suppose, for example, that a zone's key-signing
key was compromised, and the zone owner had to revoke and
replace the key. A resolver which had the old key in a
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> statement would be
unable to validate this zone any longer; it would
reply with a SERVFAIL response code. This would
continue until the resolver operator had updated the
<span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> statement with the new key.
</p>
<p>
If, however, the zone were listed in a
<span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement instead, then the
zone owner could add a "stand-by" key to the zone in advance.
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> would store the stand-by key, and
when the original key was revoked, <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
would be able to transition smoothly to the new key. It would
also recognize that the old key had been revoked, and cease
using that key to validate answers, minimizing the damage that
the compromised key could do.
</p>
<p>
A <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement contains a list of
the keys to be managed, along with information about how the
keys are to be initialized for the first time. The only
initialization method currently supported (as of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.7.0) is <code class="literal">initial-key</code>.
This means the <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement must
contain a copy of the initializing key. (Future releases may
allow keys to be initialized by other methods, eliminating this
requirement.)
</p>
<p>
Consequently, a <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement
appears similar to a <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span>, differing
in the presence of the second field, containing the keyword
<code class="literal">initial-key</code>. The difference is, whereas the
keys listed in a <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span> continue to be
trusted until they are removed from
<code class="filename">named.conf</code>, an initializing key listed
in a <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement is only trusted
<span class="emphasis"><em>once</em></span>: for as long as it takes to load the
managed key database and start the RFC 5011 key maintenance
process.
</p>
<p>
The first time <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> runs with a managed key
configured in <code class="filename">named.conf</code>, it fetches the
DNSKEY RRset directly from the zone apex, and validates it
using the key specified in the <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span>
statement. If the DNSKEY RRset is validly signed, then it is
used as the basis for a new managed keys database.
</p>
<p>
From that point on, whenever <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> runs, it
sees the <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement, checks to
make sure RFC 5011 key maintenance has already been initialized
for the specified domain, and if so, it simply moves on. The
key specified in the <span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> is not
used to validate answers; it has been superseded by the key or
keys stored in the managed keys database.
</p>
<p>
The next time <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> runs after a name
has been <span class="emphasis"><em>removed</em></span> from the
<span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> statement, the corresponding
zone will be removed from the managed keys database,
and RFC 5011 key maintenance will no longer be used for that
domain.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> only maintains a single managed keys
database; consequently, unlike <span><strong class="command">trusted-keys</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">managed-keys</strong></span> may only be set at the top
level of <code class="filename">named.conf</code>, not within a view.
</p>
<p>
In the current implementation, the managed keys database is
stored as a master-format zone file called
<code class="filename">managed-keys.bind</code>. When the key database
is changed, the zone is updated. As with any other dynamic
zone, changes will be written into a journal file,
<code class="filename">managed-keys.bind.jnl</code>. They are committed
to the master file as soon as possible afterward; in the case
of the managed key database, this will usually occur within 30
seconds. So, whenever <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> is using
automatic key maintenance, those two files can be expected to
exist in the working directory. (For this reason among others,
the working directory should be always be writable by
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>.)
</p>
<p>
If the <span><strong class="command">dnssec-lookaside</strong></span> option is
set to <strong class="userinput"><code>auto</code></strong>, <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
will automatically initialize a managed key for the
zone <code class="literal">dlv.isc.org</code>. The key that is
used to initialize the key maintenance process is built
into <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>, and can be overridden
from <span><strong class="command">bindkeys-file</strong></span>.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="view_statement_grammar"></a><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>view_name</code></em>
[<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
match-clients { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> };
match-destinations { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> };
match-recursive-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>view_option</code></em>; ...</span>]
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_statement</code></em>; ...</span>]
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2590162"></a><span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement is a powerful
feature
of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 that lets a name server
answer a DNS query differently
depending on who is asking. It is particularly useful for
implementing
split DNS setups without having to run multiple servers.
</p>
<p>
Each <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement defines a view
of the
DNS namespace that will be seen by a subset of clients. A client
matches
a view if its source IP address matches the
<code class="varname">address_match_list</code> of the view's
<span><strong class="command">match-clients</strong></span> clause and its
destination IP address matches
the <code class="varname">address_match_list</code> of the
view's
<span><strong class="command">match-destinations</strong></span> clause. If not
specified, both
<span><strong class="command">match-clients</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">match-destinations</strong></span>
default to matching all addresses. In addition to checking IP
addresses
<span><strong class="command">match-clients</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">match-destinations</strong></span>
can also take <span><strong class="command">keys</strong></span> which provide an
mechanism for the
client to select the view. A view can also be specified
as <span><strong class="command">match-recursive-only</strong></span>, which
means that only recursive
requests from matching clients will match that view.
The order of the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements is
significant —
a client request will be resolved in the context of the first
<span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> that it matches.
</p>
<p>
Zones defined within a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
statement will
only be accessible to clients that match the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>.
By defining a zone of the same name in multiple views, different
zone data can be given to different clients, for example,
"internal"
and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.
</p>
<p>
Many of the options given in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement
can also be used within a <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
statement, and then
apply only when resolving queries with that view. When no
view-specific
value is given, the value in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement
is used as a default. Also, zone options can have default values
specified
in the <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statement; these
view-specific defaults
take precedence over those in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement.
</p>
<p>
Views are class specific. If no class is given, class IN
is assumed. Note that all non-IN views must contain a hint zone,
since only the IN class has compiled-in default hints.
</p>
<p>
If there are no <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements in
the config
file, a default view that matches any client is automatically
created
in class IN. Any <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statements
specified on
the top level of the configuration file are considered to be part
of
this default view, and the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span>
statement will
apply to the default view. If any explicit <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span>
statements are present, all <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
statements must
occur inside <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements.
</p>
<p>
Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented
using <span><strong class="command">view</strong></span> statements:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">view "internal" {
// This should match our internal networks.
match-clients { 10.0.0.0/8; };
// Provide recursive service to internal
// clients only.
recursion yes;
// Provide a complete view of the example.com
// zone including addresses of internal hosts.
zone "example.com" {
type master;
file "example-internal.db";
};
};
view "external" {
// Match all clients not matched by the
// previous view.
match-clients { any; };
// Refuse recursive service to external clients.
recursion no;
// Provide a restricted view of the example.com
// zone containing only publicly accessible hosts.
zone "example.com" {
type master;
file "example-external.db";
};
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="zone_statement_grammar"></a><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span>
Statement Grammar</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting"><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type master;
[<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-transfer { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-update { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> update-policy <em class="replaceable"><code>local</code></em> | { <em class="replaceable"><code>update_policy_rule</code></em> [<span class="optional">...</span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> also-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-mx (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-wildcard <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-integrity <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> journal <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-journal-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-from-differences <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-tmp-file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> maintain-ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-ixfr-log-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>explicit</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>master-only</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-delay <em class="replaceable"><code>seconds</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-to-soa <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> pubkey <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-validity-interval <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-signing-nodes <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-signing-signatures <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> sig-signing-type <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> database <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> key-directory <em class="replaceable"><code>path_name</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> auto-dnssec <code class="constant">allow</code>|<code class="constant">maintain</code>|<code class="constant">off</code>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};
zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type slave;
[<span class="optional"> allow-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-transfer { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-update-forwarding { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> update-check-ksk <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-update-mode ( <em class="replaceable"><code>maintain</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>no-resign</code></em> ); </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-dnskey-kskonly <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dnssec-secure-to-insecure <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> try-tcp-refresh <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> also-notify { <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ;
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> journal <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-journal-size <em class="replaceable"><code>size_spec</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-from-differences <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> ixfr-tmp-file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> maintain-ixfr-base <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> masters [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] { ( <em class="replaceable"><code>masters_list</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em>
[<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>]
[<span class="optional">key <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></span>] ) ; [<span class="optional">...</span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-ixfr-log-size <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-out <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>explicit</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>master-only</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-delay <em class="replaceable"><code>seconds</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-to-soa <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> pubkey <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>)
[<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-alt-transfer-source <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> notify-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> database <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> multi-master <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zero-no-soa-ttl <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};
zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type hint;
file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ;
[<span class="optional"> delegation-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>] // Not Implemented.
};
zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type stub;
[<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> allow-query-on { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> check-names (<code class="constant">warn</code>|<code class="constant">fail</code>|<code class="constant">ignore</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> dialup <em class="replaceable"><code>dialup_option</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> delegation-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> file <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> masterfile-format (<code class="constant">text</code>|<code class="constant">raw</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> masters [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] { ( <em class="replaceable"><code>masters_list</code></em> | <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em>
[<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>]
[<span class="optional">key <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></span>] ) ; [<span class="optional">...</span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-idle-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-transfer-time-in <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> pubkey <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>)
[<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip4_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>) [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<em class="replaceable"><code>ip6_addr</code></em> | <code class="constant">*</code>)
[<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> use-alt-transfer-source <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em>; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> database <em class="replaceable"><code>string</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-refresh-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> min-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> max-retry-time <em class="replaceable"><code>number</code></em> ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> multi-master <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};
zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type static-stub;
[<span class="optional"> allow-query { <em class="replaceable"><code>address_match_list</code></em> }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> server-addresses { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> server-names { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>namelist</code></em> </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> zone-statistics <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};
zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type forward;
[<span class="optional"> forward (<code class="constant">only</code>|<code class="constant">first</code>) ; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> forwarders { [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_addr</code></em> [<span class="optional">port <em class="replaceable"><code>ip_port</code></em></span>] ; ... </span>] }; </span>]
[<span class="optional"> delegation-only <em class="replaceable"><code>yes_or_no</code></em> ; </span>]
};
zone <em class="replaceable"><code>zone_name</code></em> [<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>] {
type delegation-only;
};
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2591713"></a><span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> Statement Definition and Usage</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2591720"></a>Zone Types</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">master</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The server has a master copy of the data
for the zone and will be able to provide authoritative
answers for
it.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">slave</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A slave zone is a replica of a master
zone. The <span><strong class="command">masters</strong></span> list
specifies one or more IP addresses
of master servers that the slave contacts to update
its copy of the zone.
Masters list elements can also be names of other
masters lists.
By default, transfers are made from port 53 on the
servers; this can
be changed for all servers by specifying a port number
before the
list of IP addresses, or on a per-server basis after
the IP address.
Authentication to the master can also be done with
per-server TSIG keys.
If a file is specified, then the
replica will be written to this file whenever the zone
is changed,
and reloaded from this file on a server restart. Use
of a file is
recommended, since it often speeds server startup and
eliminates
a needless waste of bandwidth. Note that for large
numbers (in the
tens or hundreds of thousands) of zones per server, it
is best to
use a two-level naming scheme for zone filenames. For
example,
a slave server for the zone <code class="literal">example.com</code> might place
the zone contents into a file called
<code class="filename">ex/example.com</code> where <code class="filename">ex/</code> is
just the first two letters of the zone name. (Most
operating systems
behave very slowly if you put 100000 files into
a single directory.)
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">stub</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A stub zone is similar to a slave zone,
except that it replicates only the NS records of a
master zone instead
of the entire zone. Stub zones are not a standard part
of the DNS;
they are a feature specific to the <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> implementation.
</p>
<p>
Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for glue
NS record
in a parent zone at the expense of maintaining a stub
zone entry and
a set of name server addresses in <code class="filename">named.conf</code>.
This usage is not recommended for new configurations,
and BIND 9
supports it only in a limited way.
In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 4/8, zone
transfers of a parent zone
included the NS records from stub children of that
zone. This meant
that, in some cases, users could get away with
configuring child stubs
only in the master server for the parent zone. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>
9 never mixes together zone data from different zones
in this
way. Therefore, if a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 master serving a parent
zone has child stub zones configured, all the slave
servers for the
parent zone also need to have the same child stub
zones
configured.
</p>
<p>
Stub zones can also be used as a way of forcing the
resolution
of a given domain to use a particular set of
authoritative servers.
For example, the caching name servers on a private
network using
RFC1918 addressing may be configured with stub zones
for
<code class="literal">10.in-addr.arpa</code>
to use a set of internal name servers as the
authoritative
servers for that domain.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">static-stub</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A static-stub zone is similar to a stub zone
with the following exceptions:
the zone data is statically configured, rather
than transferred from a master server;
when recursion is necessary for a query that
matches a static-stub zone, the locally
configured data (nameserver names and glue addresses)
is always used even if different authoritative
information is cached.
</p>
<p>
Zone data is configured via the
<span><strong class="command">server-addresses</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">server-names</strong></span> zone options.
</p>
<p>
The zone data is maintained in the form of NS
and (if necessary) glue A or AAAA RRs
internally, which can be seen by dumping zone
databases by <span><strong class="command">rndc dumpdb -all</strong></span>.
The configured RRs are considered local configuration
parameters rather than public data.
Non recursive queries (i.e., those with the RD
bit off) to a static-stub zone are therefore
prohibited and will be responded with REFUSED.
</p>
<p>
Since the data is statically configured, no
zone maintenance action takes place for a static-stub
zone.
For example, there is no periodic refresh
attempt, and an incoming notify message
will be rejected with an rcode of NOTAUTH.
</p>
<p>
Each static-stub zone is configured with
internally generated NS and (if necessary)
glue A or AAAA RRs
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">forward</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A "forward zone" is a way to configure
forwarding on a per-domain basis. A <span><strong class="command">zone</strong></span> statement
of type <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span> can
contain a <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span>
and/or <span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span>
statement,
which will apply to queries within the domain given by
the zone
name. If no <span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span>
statement is present or
an empty list for <span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span> is given, then no
forwarding will be done for the domain, canceling the
effects of
any forwarders in the <span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> statement. Thus
if you want to use this type of zone to change the
behavior of the
global <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span> option
(that is, "forward first"
to, then "forward only", or vice versa, but want to
use the same
servers as set globally) you need to re-specify the
global forwarders.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">hint</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The initial set of root name servers is
specified using a "hint zone". When the server starts
up, it uses
the root hints to find a root name server and get the
most recent
list of root name servers. If no hint zone is
specified for class
IN, the server uses a compiled-in default set of root
servers hints.
Classes other than IN have no built-in defaults hints.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">delegation-only</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This is used to enforce the delegation-only
status of infrastructure zones (e.g. COM,
NET, ORG). Any answer that is received
without an explicit or implicit delegation
in the authority section will be treated
as NXDOMAIN. This does not apply to the
zone apex. This should not be applied to
leaf zones.
</p>
<p>
<code class="varname">delegation-only</code> has no
effect on answers received from forwarders.
</p>
<p>
See caveats in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#root_delegation_only"><span><strong class="command">root-delegation-only</strong></span></a>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2592402"></a>Class</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If
a class is not specified, class <code class="literal">IN</code> (for <code class="varname">Internet</code>),
is assumed. This is correct for the vast majority of cases.
</p>
<p>
The <code class="literal">hesiod</code> class is
named for an information service from MIT's Project Athena. It
is
used to share information about various systems databases, such
as users, groups, printers and so on. The keyword
<code class="literal">HS</code> is
a synonym for hesiod.
</p>
<p>
Another MIT development is Chaosnet, a LAN protocol created
in the mid-1970s. Zone data for it can be specified with the <code class="literal">CHAOS</code> class.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2592503"></a>Zone Options</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">allow-notify</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called “Access Control”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">allow-query</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called “Access Control”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">allow-query-on</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called “Access Control”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of <span><strong class="command">allow-transfer</strong></span>
in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called “Access Control”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span>
in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called “Access Control”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Specifies a "Simple Secure Update" policy. See
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#dynamic_update_policies" title="Dynamic Update Policies">the section called “Dynamic Update Policies”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of <span><strong class="command">allow-update-forwarding</strong></span>
in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#access_control" title="Access Control">the section called “Access Control”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Only meaningful if <span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span>
is
active for this zone. The set of machines that will
receive a
<code class="literal">DNS NOTIFY</code> message
for this zone is made up of all the listed name servers
(other than
the primary master) for the zone plus any IP addresses
specified
with <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>. A port
may be specified
with each <span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span>
address to send the notify
messages to a port other than the default of 53.
<span><strong class="command">also-notify</strong></span> is not
meaningful for stub zones.
The default is the empty list.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-names</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This option is used to restrict the character set and
syntax of
certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses
received from the
network. The default varies according to zone type. For <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> zones the default is <span><strong class="command">fail</strong></span>. For <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span>
zones the default is <span><strong class="command">warn</strong></span>.
It is not implemented for <span><strong class="command">hint</strong></span> zones.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-mx</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">check-mx</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-wildcard</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">check-wildcard</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">check-integrity</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">check-sibling</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">check-sibling</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">zero-no-soa-ttl</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">update-check-ksk</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-dnskey-kskonly</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-dnskey-kskonly</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">try-tcp-refresh</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">try-tcp-refresh</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">database</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Specify the type of database to be used for storing the
zone data. The string following the <span><strong class="command">database</strong></span> keyword
is interpreted as a list of whitespace-delimited words.
The first word
identifies the database type, and any subsequent words are
passed
as arguments to the database to be interpreted in a way
specific
to the database type.
</p>
<p>
The default is <strong class="userinput"><code>"rbt"</code></strong>, BIND 9's
native in-memory
red-black-tree database. This database does not take
arguments.
</p>
<p>
Other values are possible if additional database drivers
have been linked into the server. Some sample drivers are
included
with the distribution but none are linked in by default.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">dialup</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">delegation-only</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
The flag only applies to hint and stub zones. If set
to <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, then the zone will also be
treated as if it is also a delegation-only type zone.
</p>
<p>
See caveats in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#root_delegation_only"><span><strong class="command">root-delegation-only</strong></span></a>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders
list. The <span><strong class="command">only</strong></span> value causes
the lookup to fail
after trying the forwarders and getting no answer, while <span><strong class="command">first</strong></span> would
allow a normal lookup to be tried.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">forwarders</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Used to override the list of global forwarders.
If it is not specified in a zone of type <span><strong class="command">forward</strong></span>,
no forwarding is done for the zone and the global options are
not used.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-base</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Was used in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 to
specify the name
of the transaction log (journal) file for dynamic update
and IXFR.
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option
and constructs the name of the journal
file by appending "<code class="filename">.jnl</code>"
to the name of the
zone file.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-tmp-file</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Was an undocumented option in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8.
Ignored in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">journal</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
Allow the default journal's filename to be overridden.
The default is the zone's filename with "<code class="filename">.jnl</code>" appended.
This is applicable to <span><strong class="command">master</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">slave</strong></span> zones.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">max-journal-size</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#server_resource_limits" title="Server Resource Limits">the section called “Server Resource Limits”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-in</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-in</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-in</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">max-transfer-time-out</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-out</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">max-transfer-idle-out</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">notify</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-delay</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">notify-delay</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-to-soa</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">notify-to-soa</strong></span> in
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">pubkey</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
In <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8, this option was
intended for specifying
a public zone key for verification of signatures in DNSSEC
signed
zones when they are loaded from disk. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 does not verify signatures
on load and ignores the option.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">zone-statistics</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
If <strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>, the server will keep
statistical
information for this zone, which can be dumped to the
<span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span> defined in
the server options.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">server-addresses</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Only meaningful for static-stub zones.
This is a list of IP addresses to which queries
should be sent in recursive resolution for the
zone.
A non empty list for this option will internally
configure the apex NS RR with associated glue A or
AAAA RRs.
</p>
<p>
For example, if "example.com" is configured as a
static-stub zone with 192.0.2.1 and 2001:db8::1234
in a <span><strong class="command">server-addresses</strong></span> option,
the following RRs will be internally configured.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">example.com. NS example.com.
example.com. A 192.0.2.1
example.com. AAAA 2001:db8::1234</pre>
<p>
These records are internally used to resolve
names under the static-stub zone.
For instance, if the server receives a query for
"www.example.com" with the RD bit on, the server
will initiate recursive resolution and send
queries to 192.0.2.1 and/or 2001:db8::1234.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">server-names</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Only meaningful for static-stub zones.
This is a list of domain names of nameservers that
act as authoritative servers of the static-stub
zone.
These names will be resolved to IP addresses when
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> needs to send queries to
these servers.
To make this supplemental resolution successful,
these names must not be a subdomain of the origin
name of static-stub zone.
That is, when "example.net" is the origin of a
static-stub zone, "ns.example" and
"master.example.com" can be specified in the
<span><strong class="command">server-names</strong></span> option, but
"ns.example.net" cannot, and will be rejected by
the configuration parser.
</p>
<p>
A non empty list for this option will internally
configure the apex NS RR with the specified names.
For example, if "example.com" is configured as a
static-stub zone with "ns1.example.net" and
"ns2.example.net"
in a <span><strong class="command">server-names</strong></span> option,
the following RRs will be internally configured.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">example.com. NS ns1.example.net.
example.com. NS ns2.example.net.
</pre>
<p>
These records are internally used to resolve
names under the static-stub zone.
For instance, if the server receives a query for
"www.example.com" with the RD bit on, the server
initiate recursive resolution,
resolve "ns1.example.net" and/or
"ns2.example.net" to IP addresses, and then send
queries to (one or more of) these addresses.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">sig-validity-interval</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-nodes</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">sig-signing-nodes</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-signatures</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">sig-signing-signatures</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">sig-signing-type</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">sig-signing-type</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">transfer-source-v6</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">alt-transfer-source-v6</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">use-alt-transfer-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">notify-source</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">notify-source-v6</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#zone_transfers" title="Zone Transfers">the section called “Zone Transfers”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt>
<span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-refresh-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">min-retry-time</strong></span>, </span><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">max-retry-time</strong></span></span>
</dt>
<dd><p>
See the description in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
(Note that the <span><strong class="command">ixfr-from-differences</strong></span>
<strong class="userinput"><code>master</code></strong> and
<strong class="userinput"><code>slave</code></strong> choices are not
available at the zone level.)
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">key-directory</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">key-directory</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#options" title="options Statement Definition and
Usage">the section called “<span><strong class="command">options</strong></span> Statement Definition and
Usage”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">auto-dnssec</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd>
<p>
Zones configured for dynamic DNS may also use this
option to allow varying levels of automatic DNSSEC key
management. There are three possible settings:
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">auto-dnssec allow;</strong></span> permits
keys to be updated and the zone fully re-signed
whenever the user issues the command <span><strong class="command">rndc sign
<em class="replaceable"><code>zonename</code></em></strong></span>.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">auto-dnssec maintain;</strong></span> includes the
above, but also automatically adjusts the zone's DNSSEC
keys on schedule, according to the keys' timing metadata
(see <a href="man.dnssec-keygen.html" title="dnssec-keygen"><span class="refentrytitle"><span class="application">dnssec-keygen</span></span>(8)</a> and
<a href="man.dnssec-settime.html" title="dnssec-settime"><span class="refentrytitle"><span class="application">dnssec-settime</span></span>(8)</a>). The command
<span><strong class="command">rndc sign
<em class="replaceable"><code>zonename</code></em></strong></span> causes
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to load keys from the key
repository and sign the zone with all keys that are
active.
<span><strong class="command">rndc loadkeys
<em class="replaceable"><code>zonename</code></em></strong></span> causes
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to load keys from the key
repository and schedule key maintenance events to occur
in the future, but it does not sign the full zone
immediately. Note: once keys have been loaded for a
zone the first time, the repository will be searched
for changes periodically, regardless of whether
<span><strong class="command">rndc loadkeys</strong></span> is used. The recheck
interval is hard-coded to
one hour.
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">auto-dnssec create;</strong></span> includes the
above, but also allows <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
to create new keys in the key repository when needed.
(NOTE: This option is not yet implemented; the syntax is
being reserved for future use.)
</p>
<p>
The default setting is <span><strong class="command">auto-dnssec off</strong></span>.
</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">multi-master</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of <span><strong class="command">multi-master</strong></span> in
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of <span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span>
in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#tuning" title="Tuning">the section called “Tuning”</a>.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">dnssec-secure-to-insecure</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
See the description of
<span><strong class="command">dnssec-secure-to-insecure</strong></span> in <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#boolean_options" title="Boolean Options">the section called “Boolean Options”</a>.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="dynamic_update_policies"></a>Dynamic Update Policies</h4></div></div></div>
<p><acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 supports two alternative
methods of granting clients the right to perform
dynamic updates to a zone, configured by the
<span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> option, respectively.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span> clause works the
same way as in previous versions of <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym>.
It grants given clients the permission to update any
record of any name in the zone.
</p>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> clause
allows more fine-grained control over what updates are
allowed. A set of rules is specified, where each rule
either grants or denies permissions for one or more
names to be updated by one or more identities. If
the dynamic update request message is signed (that is,
it includes either a TSIG or SIG(0) record), the
identity of the signer can be determined.
</p>
<p>
Rules are specified in the <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span>
zone option, and are only meaningful for master zones.
When the <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement
is present, it is a configuration error for the
<span><strong class="command">allow-update</strong></span> statement to be
present. The <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement
only examines the signer of a message; the source
address is not relevant.
</p>
<p>
There is a pre-defined <span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span>
rule which can be switched on with the command
<span><strong class="command">update-policy local;</strong></span>.
Switching on this rule in a zone causes
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> to generate a TSIG session
key and place it in a file, and to allow that key
to update the zone. (By default, the file is
<code class="filename">/var/run/named/session.key</code>, the key
name is "local-ddns" and the key algorithm is HMAC-SHA256,
but these values are configurable with the
<span><strong class="command">session-keyfile</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">session-keyname</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">session-keyalg</strong></span> options, respectively).
</p>
<p>
A client running on the local system, and with appropriate
permissions, may read that file and use the key to sign update
requests. The zone's update policy will be set to allow that
key to change any record within the zone. Assuming the
key name is "local-ddns", this policy is equivalent to:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">update-policy { grant local-ddns zonesub any; };
</pre>
<p>
The command <span><strong class="command">nsupdate -l</strong></span> sends update
requests to localhost, and signs them using the session key.
</p>
<p>
Other rule definitions look like this:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
( <span><strong class="command">grant</strong></span> | <span><strong class="command">deny</strong></span> ) <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>nametype</code></em> [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> </span>] [<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>types</code></em> </span>]
</pre>
<p>
Each rule grants or denies privileges. Once a message has
successfully matched a rule, the operation is immediately
granted or denied and no further rules are examined. A rule
is matched when the signer matches the identity field, the
name matches the name field in accordance with the nametype
field, and the type matches the types specified in the type
field.
</p>
<p>
No signer is required for <em class="replaceable"><code>tcp-self</code></em>
or <em class="replaceable"><code>6to4-self</code></em> however the standard
reverse mapping / prefix conversion must match the identity
field.
</p>
<p>
The identity field specifies a name or a wildcard
name. Normally, this is the name of the TSIG or
SIG(0) key used to sign the update request. When a
TKEY exchange has been used to create a shared secret,
the identity of the shared secret is the same as the
identity of the key used to authenticate the TKEY
exchange. TKEY is also the negotiation method used
by GSS-TSIG, which establishes an identity that is
the Kerberos principal of the client, such as
<strong class="userinput"><code>"user@host.domain"</code></strong>. When the
<em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field specifies
a wildcard name, it is subject to DNS wildcard
expansion, so the rule will apply to multiple identities.
The <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field must
contain a fully-qualified domain name.
</p>
<p>
For nametypes <code class="varname">krb5-self</code>,
<code class="varname">ms-self</code>, <code class="varname">krb5-subdomain</code>,
and <code class="varname">ms-subdomain</code> the
<em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field specifies
the Windows or Kerberos realm of the machine belongs to.
</p>
<p>
The <em class="replaceable"><code>nametype</code></em> field has 13
values:
<code class="varname">name</code>, <code class="varname">subdomain</code>,
<code class="varname">wildcard</code>, <code class="varname">self</code>,
<code class="varname">selfsub</code>, <code class="varname">selfwild</code>,
<code class="varname">krb5-self</code>, <code class="varname">ms-self</code>,
<code class="varname">krb5-subdomain</code>,
<code class="varname">ms-subdomain</code>,
<code class="varname">tcp-self</code>, <code class="varname">6to4-self</code>,
<code class="varname">zonesub</code>, and <code class="varname">external</code>.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">name</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Exact-match semantics. This rule matches
when the name being updated is identical
to the contents of the
<em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">subdomain</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule matches when the name being updated
is a subdomain of, or identical to, the
contents of the <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em>
field.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">zonesub</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule is similar to subdomain, except that
it matches when the name being updated is a
subdomain of the zone in which the
<span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement
appears. This obviates the need to type the zone
name twice, and enables the use of a standard
<span><strong class="command">update-policy</strong></span> statement in
multiple zones without modification.
</p>
<p>
When this rule is used, the
<em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field is omitted.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">wildcard</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field
is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and
this rule matches when the name being updated
name is a valid expansion of the wildcard.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">self</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule matches when the name being updated
matches the contents of the
<em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field.
The <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> field
is ignored, but should be the same as the
<em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> field.
The <code class="varname">self</code> nametype is
most useful when allowing using one key per
name to update, where the key has the same
name as the name to be updated. The
<em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em> would
be specified as <code class="constant">*</code> (an asterisk) in
this case.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">selfsub</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule is similar to <code class="varname">self</code>
except that subdomains of <code class="varname">self</code>
can also be updated.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">selfwild</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule is similar to <code class="varname">self</code>
except that only subdomains of
<code class="varname">self</code> can be updated.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ms-self</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule takes a Windows machine principal
(machine$@REALM) for machine in REALM and
and converts it machine.realm allowing the machine
to update machine.realm. The REALM to be matched
is specified in the <font color="red"><replacable>identity</replacable></font>
field.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">ms-subdomain</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule takes a Windows machine principal
(machine$@REALM) for machine in REALM and
converts it to machine.realm allowing the machine
to update subdomains of machine.realm. The REALM
to be matched is specified in the
<font color="red"><replacable>identity</replacable></font> field.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">krb5-self</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule takes a Kerberos machine principal
(host/machine@REALM) for machine in REALM and
and converts it machine.realm allowing the machine
to update machine.realm. The REALM to be matched
is specified in the <font color="red"><replacable>identity</replacable></font>
field.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">krb5-subdomain</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule takes a Kerberos machine principal
(host/machine@REALM) for machine in REALM and
converts it to machine.realm allowing the machine
to update subdomains of machine.realm. The REALM
to be matched is specified in the
<font color="red"><replacable>identity</replacable></font> field.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">tcp-self</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Allow updates that have been sent via TCP and
for which the standard mapping from the initiating
IP address into the IN-ADDR.ARPA and IP6.ARPA
namespaces match the name to be updated.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
It is theoretically possible to spoof these TCP
sessions.
</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">6to4-self</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Allow the 6to4 prefix to be update by any TCP
connection from the 6to4 network or from the
corresponding IPv4 address. This is intended
to allow NS or DNAME RRsets to be added to the
reverse tree.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
It is theoretically possible to spoof these TCP
sessions.
</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="varname">external</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This rule allows <span><strong class="command">named</strong></span>
to defer the decision of whether to allow a
given update to an external daemon.
</p>
<p>
The method of communicating with the daemon is
specified in the <em class="replaceable"><code>identity</code></em>
field, the format of which is
"<code class="constant">local:</code><em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em>",
where <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> is the location
of a UNIX-domain socket. (Currently, "local" is the
only supported mechanism.)
</p>
<p>
Requests to the external daemon are sent over the
UNIX-domain socket as datagrams with the following
format:
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
Protocol version number (4 bytes, network byte order, currently 1)
Request length (4 bytes, network byte order)
Signer (null-terminated string)
Name (null-terminated string)
TCP source address (null-terminated string)
Rdata type (null-terminated string)
Key (null-terminated string)
TKEY token length (4 bytes, network byte order)
TKEY token (remainder of packet)</pre>
<p>
The daemon replies with a four-byte value in
network byte order, containing either 0 or 1; 0
indicates that the specified update is not
permitted, and 1 indicates that it is.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
In all cases, the <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em>
field must specify a fully-qualified domain name.
</p>
<p>
If no types are explicitly specified, this rule matches
all types except RRSIG, NS, SOA, NSEC and NSEC3. Types
may be specified by name, including "ANY" (ANY matches
all types except NSEC and NSEC3, which can never be
updated). Note that when an attempt is made to delete
all records associated with a name, the rules are
checked for each existing record type.
</p>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="id2595116"></a>Zone File</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them"></a>Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
This section, largely borrowed from RFC 1034, describes the
concept of a Resource Record (RR) and explains when each is used.
Since the publication of RFC 1034, several new RRs have been
identified
and implemented in the DNS. These are also included.
</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2595134"></a>Resource Records</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
A domain name identifies a node. Each node has a set of
resource information, which may be empty. The set of resource
information associated with a particular name is composed of
separate RRs. The order of RRs in a set is not significant and
need not be preserved by name servers, resolvers, or other
parts of the DNS. However, sorting of multiple RRs is
permitted for optimization purposes, for example, to specify
that a particular nearby server be tried first. See <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#the_sortlist_statement" title="The sortlist Statement">the section called “The <span><strong class="command">sortlist</strong></span> Statement”</a> and <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#rrset_ordering" title="RRset Ordering">the section called “RRset Ordering”</a>.
</p>
<p>
The components of a Resource Record are:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
owner name
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The domain name where the RR is found.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
type
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An encoded 16-bit value that specifies
the type of the resource record.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
TTL
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The time-to-live of the RR. This field
is a 32-bit integer in units of seconds, and is
primarily used by
resolvers when they cache RRs. The TTL describes how
long a RR can
be cached before it should be discarded.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
class
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
An encoded 16-bit value that identifies
a protocol family or instance of a protocol.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
RDATA
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The resource data. The format of the
data is type (and sometimes class) specific.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
The following are <span class="emphasis"><em>types</em></span> of valid RRs:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
A
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A host address. In the IN class, this is a
32-bit IP address. Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
AAAA
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 address. Described in RFC 1886.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
A6
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 address. This can be a partial
address (a suffix) and an indirection to the name
where the rest of the
address (the prefix) can be found. Experimental.
Described in RFC 2874.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
AFSDB
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Location of AFS database servers.
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
APL
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Address prefix list. Experimental.
Described in RFC 3123.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
CERT
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Holds a digital certificate.
Described in RFC 2538.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
CNAME
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Identifies the canonical name of an alias.
Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
DHCID
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Is used for identifying which DHCP client is
associated with this name. Described in RFC 4701.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
DNAME
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Replaces the domain name specified with
another name to be looked up, effectively aliasing an
entire
subtree of the domain name space rather than a single
record
as in the case of the CNAME RR.
Described in RFC 2672.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
DNSKEY
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Stores a public key associated with a signed
DNS zone. Described in RFC 4034.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
DS
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Stores the hash of a public key associated with a
signed DNS zone. Described in RFC 4034.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
GPOS
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Specifies the global position. Superseded by LOC.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
HINFO
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Identifies the CPU and OS used by a host.
Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
IPSECKEY
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Provides a method for storing IPsec keying material in
DNS. Described in RFC 4025.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
ISDN
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Representation of ISDN addresses.
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
KEY
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Stores a public key associated with a
DNS name. Used in original DNSSEC; replaced
by DNSKEY in DNSSECbis, but still used with
SIG(0). Described in RFCs 2535 and 2931.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
KX
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Identifies a key exchanger for this
DNS name. Described in RFC 2230.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
LOC
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
For storing GPS info. Described in RFC 1876.
Experimental.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
MX
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Identifies a mail exchange for the domain with
a 16-bit preference value (lower is better)
followed by the host name of the mail exchange.
Described in RFC 974, RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NAPTR
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Name authority pointer. Described in RFC 2915.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NSAP
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A network service access point.
Described in RFC 1706.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NS
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The authoritative name server for the
domain. Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NSEC
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Used in DNSSECbis to securely indicate that
RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do
not exist in
a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an
existing name.
Described in RFC 4034.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NSEC3
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Used in DNSSECbis to securely indicate that
RRs with an owner name in a certain name
interval do not exist in a zone and indicate
what RR types are present for an existing
name. NSEC3 differs from NSEC in that it
prevents zone enumeration but is more
computationally expensive on both the server
and the client than NSEC. Described in RFC
5155.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NSEC3PARAM
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Used in DNSSECbis to tell the authoritative
server which NSEC3 chains are available to use.
Described in RFC 5155.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
NXT
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Used in DNSSEC to securely indicate that
RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do
not exist in
a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an
existing name.
Used in original DNSSEC; replaced by NSEC in
DNSSECbis.
Described in RFC 2535.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
PTR
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
A pointer to another part of the domain
name space. Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
PX
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Provides mappings between RFC 822 and X.400
addresses. Described in RFC 2163.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
RP
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Information on persons responsible
for the domain. Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
RRSIG
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Contains DNSSECbis signature data. Described
in RFC 4034.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
RT
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Route-through binding for hosts that
do not have their own direct wide area network
addresses.
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
SIG
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Contains DNSSEC signature data. Used in
original DNSSEC; replaced by RRSIG in
DNSSECbis, but still used for SIG(0).
Described in RFCs 2535 and 2931.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
SOA
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Identifies the start of a zone of authority.
Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
SPF
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Contains the Sender Policy Framework information
for a given email domain. Described in RFC 4408.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
SRV
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Information about well known network
services (replaces WKS). Described in RFC 2782.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
SSHFP
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Provides a way to securely publish a secure shell key's
fingerprint. Described in RFC 4255.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
TXT
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Text records. Described in RFC 1035.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
WKS
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Information about which well known
network services, such as SMTP, that a domain
supports. Historical.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
X25
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Representation of X.25 network addresses.
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
The following <span class="emphasis"><em>classes</em></span> of resource records
are currently valid in the DNS:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
IN
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The Internet.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
CH
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Chaosnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the
mid-1970s.
Rarely used for its historical purpose, but reused for
BIND's
built-in server information zones, e.g.,
<code class="literal">version.bind</code>.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
HS
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Hesiod, an information service
developed by MIT's Project Athena. It is used to share
information
about various systems databases, such as users,
groups, printers
and so on.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an
integral
part of the RR. For example, many name servers internally form
tree
or hash structures for the name space, and chain RRs off nodes.
The remaining RR parts are the fixed header (type, class, TTL)
which is consistent for all RRs, and a variable part (RDATA)
that
fits the needs of the resource being described.
</p>
<p>
The meaning of the TTL field is a time limit on how long an
RR can be kept in a cache. This limit does not apply to
authoritative
data in zones; it is also timed out, but by the refreshing
policies
for the zone. The TTL is assigned by the administrator for the
zone where the data originates. While short TTLs can be used to
minimize caching, and a zero TTL prohibits caching, the
realities
of Internet performance suggest that these times should be on
the
order of days for the typical host. If a change can be
anticipated,
the TTL can be reduced prior to the change to minimize
inconsistency
during the change, and then increased back to its former value
following
the change.
</p>
<p>
The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination
of binary strings and domain names. The domain names are
frequently
used as "pointers" to other data in the DNS.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2596826"></a>Textual expression of RRs</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS
protocol, and are usually represented in highly encoded form
when
stored in a name server or resolver. In the examples provided
in
RFC 1034, a style similar to that used in master files was
employed
in order to show the contents of RRs. In this format, most RRs
are shown on a single line, although continuation lines are
possible
using parentheses.
</p>
<p>
The start of the line gives the owner of the RR. If a line
begins with a blank, then the owner is assumed to be the same as
that of the previous RR. Blank lines are often included for
readability.
</p>
<p>
Following the owner, we list the TTL, type, and class of the
RR. Class and type use the mnemonics defined above, and TTL is
an integer before the type field. In order to avoid ambiguity
in
parsing, type and class mnemonics are disjoint, TTLs are
integers,
and the type mnemonic is always last. The IN class and TTL
values
are often omitted from examples in the interests of clarity.
</p>
<p>
The resource data or RDATA section of the RR are given using
knowledge of the typical representation for the data.
</p>
<p>
For example, we might show the RRs carried in a message as:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">ISI.EDU.</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">MX</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10 VENERA.ISI.EDU.</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">MX</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10 VAXA.ISI.EDU</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">VENERA.ISI.EDU</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">128.9.0.32</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10.1.0.52</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">VAXA.ISI.EDU</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10.2.0.27</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">128.9.0.33</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16-bit
number followed by a domain name. The address RRs use a
standard
IP address format to contain a 32-bit internet address.
</p>
<p>
The above example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three
domain names.
</p>
<p>
Similarly we might see:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">XX.LCS.MIT.EDU.</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10.0.0.44</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> </td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">CH A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">MIT.EDU. 2420</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
This example shows two addresses for
<code class="literal">XX.LCS.MIT.EDU</code>, each of a different class.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2597415"></a>Discussion of MX Records</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
As described above, domain servers store information as a
series of resource records, each of which contains a particular
piece of information about a given domain name (which is usually,
but not always, a host). The simplest way to think of a RR is as
a typed pair of data, a domain name matched with a relevant datum,
and stored with some additional type information to help systems
determine when the RR is relevant.
</p>
<p>
MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data
specified in the record is a priority and a domain name. The
priority
controls the order in which email delivery is attempted, with the
lowest number first. If two priorities are the same, a server is
chosen randomly. If no servers at a given priority are responding,
the mail transport agent will fall back to the next largest
priority.
Priority numbers do not have any absolute meaning — they are
relevant
only respective to other MX records for that domain name. The
domain
name given is the machine to which the mail will be delivered.
It <span class="emphasis"><em>must</em></span> have an associated address record
(A or AAAA) — CNAME is not sufficient.
</p>
<p>
For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an
MX record, the MX record is in error, and will be ignored.
Instead,
the mail will be delivered to the server specified in the MX
record
pointed to by the CNAME.
For example:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">example.com.</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">MX</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">mail.example.com.</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">MX</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">mail2.example.com.</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">MX</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">20</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">mail.backup.org.</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">mail.example.com.</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10.0.0.1</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">mail2.example.com.</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">A</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">10.0.0.2</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p></p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
Mail delivery will be attempted to <code class="literal">mail.example.com</code> and
<code class="literal">mail2.example.com</code> (in
any order), and if neither of those succeed, delivery to <code class="literal">mail.backup.org</code> will
be attempted.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="Setting_TTLs"></a>Setting TTLs</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The time-to-live of the RR field is a 32-bit integer represented
in units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they
cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can be cached before it
should be discarded. The following three types of TTL are
currently
used in a zone file.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
SOA
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The last field in the SOA is the negative
caching TTL. This controls how long other servers will
cache no-such-domain
(NXDOMAIN) responses from you.
</p>
<p>
The maximum time for
negative caching is 3 hours (3h).
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
$TTL
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The $TTL directive at the top of the
zone file (before the SOA) gives a default TTL for every
RR without
a specific TTL set.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
RR TTLs
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Each RR can have a TTL as the second
field in the RR, which will control how long other
servers can cache
the it.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units
can be explicitly specified, for example, <code class="literal">1h30m</code>.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2597962"></a>Inverse Mapping in IPv4</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address
to name) is achieved by means of the <span class="emphasis"><em>in-addr.arpa</em></span> domain
and PTR records. Entries in the in-addr.arpa domain are made in
least-to-most significant order, read left to right. This is the
opposite order to the way IP addresses are usually written. Thus,
a machine with an IP address of 10.1.2.3 would have a
corresponding
in-addr.arpa name of
3.2.1.10.in-addr.arpa. This name should have a PTR resource record
whose data field is the name of the machine or, optionally,
multiple
PTR records if the machine has more than one name. For example,
in the [<span class="optional">example.com</span>] domain:
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">$ORIGIN</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">2.1.10.in-addr.arpa</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">3</code>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<code class="literal">IN PTR foo.example.com.</code>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> lines in the examples
are for providing context to the examples only — they do not
necessarily
appear in the actual usage. They are only used here to indicate
that the example is relative to the listed origin.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2598157"></a>Other Zone File Directives</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The Master File Format was initially defined in RFC 1035 and
has subsequently been extended. While the Master File Format
itself
is class independent all records in a Master File must be of the
same
class.
</p>
<p>
Master File Directives include <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>, <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span>,
and <span><strong class="command">$TTL.</strong></span>
</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2598180"></a>The <span><strong class="command">@</strong></span> (at-sign)</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
When used in the label (or name) field, the asperand or
at-sign (@) symbol represents the current origin.
At the start of the zone file, it is the
<<code class="varname">zone_name</code>> (followed by
trailing dot).
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2598196"></a>The <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> Directive</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
<em class="replaceable"><code>domain-name</code></em>
[<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em></span>]
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
sets the domain name that will be appended to any
unqualified records. When a zone is first read in there
is an implicit <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
<<code class="varname">zone_name</code>><span><strong class="command">.</strong></span>
(followed by trailing dot).
The current <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> is appended to
the domain specified in the <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span>
argument if it is not absolute.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
$ORIGIN example.com.
WWW CNAME MAIN-SERVER
</pre>
<p>
is equivalent to
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.
</pre>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2598325"></a>The <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span> Directive</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span>
<em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>
[<span class="optional">
<em class="replaceable"><code>origin</code></em> </span>]
[<span class="optional"> <em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em> </span>]
</p>
<p>
Read and process the file <code class="filename">filename</code> as
if it were included into the file at this point. If <span><strong class="command">origin</strong></span> is
specified the file is processed with <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> set
to that value, otherwise the current <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> is
used.
</p>
<p>
The origin and the current domain name
revert to the values they had prior to the <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span> once
the file has been read.
</p>
<div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Note</h3>
<p>
RFC 1035 specifies that the current origin should be restored
after
an <span><strong class="command">$INCLUDE</strong></span>, but it is silent
on whether the current
domain name should also be restored. BIND 9 restores both of
them.
This could be construed as a deviation from RFC 1035, a
feature, or both.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2598394"></a>The <span><strong class="command">$TTL</strong></span> Directive</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$TTL</strong></span>
<em class="replaceable"><code>default-ttl</code></em>
[<span class="optional">
<em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em> </span>]
</p>
<p>
Set the default Time To Live (TTL) for subsequent records
with undefined TTLs. Valid TTLs are of the range 0-2147483647
seconds.
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">$TTL</strong></span>
is defined in RFC 2308.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="id2598430"></a><acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> Master File Extension: the <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> Directive</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
Syntax: <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span>
<em class="replaceable"><code>range</code></em>
<em class="replaceable"><code>lhs</code></em>
[<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>ttl</code></em></span>]
[<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>class</code></em></span>]
<em class="replaceable"><code>type</code></em>
<em class="replaceable"><code>rhs</code></em>
[<span class="optional"><em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em></span>]
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span>
is used to create a series of resource records that only
differ from each other by an
iterator. <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> can be used to
easily generate the sets of records required to support
sub /24 reverse delegations described in RFC 2317:
Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA delegation.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
$GENERATE 1-2 @ NS SERVER$.EXAMPLE.
$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0</pre>
<p>
is equivalent to
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER2.EXAMPLE.
1.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 1.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
2.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 2.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
...
127.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 127.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
</pre>
<p>
Generate a set of A and MX records. Note the MX's right hand
side is a quoted string. The quotes will be stripped when the
right hand side is processed.
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
$ORIGIN EXAMPLE.
$GENERATE 1-127 HOST-$ A 1.2.3.$
$GENERATE 1-127 HOST-$ MX "0 ."</pre>
<p>
is equivalent to
</p>
<pre class="programlisting">HOST-1.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.1
HOST-1.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
HOST-2.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.2
HOST-2.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
HOST-3.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.3
HOST-3.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
...
HOST-127.EXAMPLE. A 1.2.3.127
HOST-127.EXAMPLE. MX 0 .
</pre>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">range</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
This can be one of two forms: start-stop
or start-stop/step. If the first form is used, then step
is set to
1. All of start, stop and step must be positive.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">lhs</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>This
describes the owner name of the resource records
to be created. Any single <span><strong class="command">$</strong></span>
(dollar sign)
symbols within the <span><strong class="command">lhs</strong></span> string
are replaced by the iterator value.
To get a $ in the output, you need to escape the
<span><strong class="command">$</strong></span> using a backslash
<span><strong class="command">\</strong></span>,
e.g. <span><strong class="command">\$</strong></span>. The
<span><strong class="command">$</strong></span> may optionally be followed
by modifiers which change the offset from the
iterator, field width and base.
Modifiers are introduced by a
<span><strong class="command">{</strong></span> (left brace) immediately following the
<span><strong class="command">$</strong></span> as
<span><strong class="command">${offset[,width[,base]]}</strong></span>.
For example, <span><strong class="command">${-20,3,d}</strong></span>
subtracts 20 from the current value, prints the
result as a decimal in a zero-padded field of
width 3.
Available output forms are decimal
(<span><strong class="command">d</strong></span>), octal
(<span><strong class="command">o</strong></span>), hexadecimal
(<span><strong class="command">x</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">X</strong></span>
for uppercase) and nibble
(<span><strong class="command">n</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">N</strong></span>\
for uppercase). The default modifier is
<span><strong class="command">${0,0,d}</strong></span>. If the
<span><strong class="command">lhs</strong></span> is not absolute, the
current <span><strong class="command">$ORIGIN</strong></span> is appended
to the name.
</p>
<p>
In nibble mode the value will be treated as
if it was a reversed hexadecimal string
with each hexadecimal digit as a separate
label. The width field includes the label
separator.
</p>
<p>
For compatibility with earlier versions,
<span><strong class="command">$$</strong></span> is still recognized as
indicating a literal $ in the output.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ttl</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Specifies the time-to-live of the generated records. If
not specified this will be inherited using the
normal TTL inheritance rules.
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">class</strong></span>
and <span><strong class="command">ttl</strong></span> can be
entered in either order.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">class</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Specifies the class of the generated records.
This must match the zone class if it is
specified.
</p>
<p><span><strong class="command">class</strong></span>
and <span><strong class="command">ttl</strong></span> can be
entered in either order.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">type</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Any valid type.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">rhs</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">rhs</strong></span>, optionally, quoted string.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
The <span><strong class="command">$GENERATE</strong></span> directive is a <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> extension
and not part of the standard zone file format.
</p>
<p>
BIND 8 does not support the optional TTL and CLASS fields.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="zonefile_format"></a>Additional File Formats</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
In addition to the standard textual format, BIND 9
supports the ability to read or dump to zone files in
other formats. The <code class="constant">raw</code> format is
currently available as an additional format. It is a
binary format representing BIND 9's internal data
structure directly, thereby remarkably improving the
loading time.
</p>
<p>
For a primary server, a zone file in the
<code class="constant">raw</code> format is expected to be
generated from a textual zone file by the
<span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> command. For a
secondary server or for a dynamic zone, it is automatically
generated (if this format is specified by the
<span><strong class="command">masterfile-format</strong></span> option) when
<span><strong class="command">named</strong></span> dumps the zone contents after
zone transfer or when applying prior updates.
</p>
<p>
If a zone file in a binary format needs manual modification,
it first must be converted to a textual form by the
<span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> command. All
necessary modification should go to the text file, which
should then be converted to the binary form by the
<span><strong class="command">named-compilezone</strong></span> command again.
</p>
<p>
Although the <code class="constant">raw</code> format uses the
network byte order and avoids architecture-dependent
data alignment so that it is as much portable as
possible, it is primarily expected to be used inside
the same single system. In order to export a zone
file in the <code class="constant">raw</code> format or make a
portable backup of the file, it is recommended to
convert the file to the standard textual representation.
</p>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="statistics"></a>BIND9 Statistics</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 maintains lots of statistics
information and provides several interfaces for users to
get access to the statistics.
The available statistics include all statistics counters
that were available in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 and
are meaningful in <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9,
and other information that is considered useful.
</p>
<p>
The statistics information is categorized into the following
sections.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Incoming Requests</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of incoming DNS requests for each OPCODE.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Incoming Queries</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of incoming queries for each RR type.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Outgoing Queries</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of outgoing queries for each RR
type sent from the internal resolver.
Maintained per view.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Name Server Statistics</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Statistics counters about incoming request processing.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Zone Maintenance Statistics</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Statistics counters regarding zone maintenance
operations such as zone transfers.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Resolver Statistics</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Statistics counters about name resolution
performed in the internal resolver.
Maintained per view.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Cache DB RRsets</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
The number of RRsets per RR type and nonexistent
names stored in the cache database.
If the exclamation mark (!) is printed for a RR
type, it means that particular type of RRset is
known to be nonexistent (this is also known as
"NXRRSET").
Maintained per view.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p>Socket I/O Statistics</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Statistics counters about network related events.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
<p>
A subset of Name Server Statistics is collected and shown
per zone for which the server has the authority when
<span><strong class="command">zone-statistics</strong></span> is set to
<strong class="userinput"><code>yes</code></strong>.
These statistics counters are shown with their zone and view
names.
In some cases the view names are omitted for the default view.
</p>
<p>
There are currently two user interfaces to get access to the
statistics.
One is in the plain text format dumped to the file specified
by the <span><strong class="command">statistics-file</strong></span> configuration option.
The other is remotely accessible via a statistics channel
when the <span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> statement
is specified in the configuration file
(see <a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#statschannels" title="statistics-channels Statement Grammar">the section called “<span><strong class="command">statistics-channels</strong></span> Statement Grammar”</a>.)
</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="statsfile"></a>The Statistics File</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
The text format statistics dump begins with a line, like:
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">+++ Statistics Dump +++ (973798949)</strong></span>
</p>
<p>
The number in parentheses is a standard
Unix-style timestamp, measured as seconds since January 1, 1970.
Following
that line is a set of statistics information, which is categorized
as described above.
Each section begins with a line, like:
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">++ Name Server Statistics ++</strong></span>
</p>
<p>
Each section consists of lines, each containing the statistics
counter value followed by its textual description.
See below for available counters.
For brevity, counters that have a value of 0 are not shown
in the statistics file.
</p>
<p>
The statistics dump ends with the line where the
number is identical to the number in the beginning line; for example:
</p>
<p>
<span><strong class="command">--- Statistics Dump --- (973798949)</strong></span>
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
<a name="statistics_counters"></a>Statistics Counters</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The following tables summarize statistics counters that
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 provides.
For each row of the tables, the leftmost column is the
abbreviated symbol name of that counter.
These symbols are shown in the statistics information
accessed via an HTTP statistics channel.
The rightmost column gives the description of the counter,
which is also shown in the statistics file
(but, in this document, possibly with slight modification
for better readability).
Additional notes may also be provided in this column.
When a middle column exists between these two columns,
it gives the corresponding counter name of the
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 8 statistics, if applicable.
</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2599384"></a>Name Server Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>BIND8 Symbol</em></span>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Requestv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 requests received.
Note: this also counts non query requests.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Requestv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 requests received.
Note: this also counts non query requests.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ReqEdns0</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Requests with EDNS(0) received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ReqBadEDNSVer</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Requests with unsupported EDNS version received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ReqTSIG</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Requests with TSIG received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ReqSIG0</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Requests with SIG(0) received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ReqBadSIG</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Requests with invalid (TSIG or SIG(0)) signature.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ReqTCP</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RTCP</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
TCP requests received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">AuthQryRej</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RUQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Authoritative (non recursive) queries rejected.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RecQryRej</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RURQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Recursive queries rejected.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">XfrRej</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RUXFR</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Zone transfer requests rejected.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateRej</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RUUpd</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dynamic update requests rejected.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Response</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SAns</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Responses sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RespTruncated</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Truncated responses sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RespEDNS0</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Responses with EDNS(0) sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RespTSIG</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Responses with TSIG sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RespSIG0</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Responses with SIG(0) sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QrySuccess</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in a successful answer.
This means the query which returns a NOERROR response
with at least one answer RR.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">success</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryAuthAns</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in authoritative answer.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryNoauthAns</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SNaAns</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in non authoritative answer.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryReferral</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in referral answer.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">referral</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryNxrrset</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in NOERROR responses with no data.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">nxrrset</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QrySERVFAIL</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in SERVFAIL.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryFORMERR</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SFErr</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in FORMERR.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryNXDOMAIN</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SNXD</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries resulted in NXDOMAIN.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">nxdomain</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryRecursion</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RFwdQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries which caused the server
to perform recursion in order to find the final answer.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">recursion</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryDuplicate</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RDupQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries which the server attempted to
recurse but discovered an existing query with the same
IP address, port, query ID, name, type and class
already being processed.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">duplicate</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryDropped</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Recursive queries for which the server
discovered an excessive number of existing
recursive queries for the same name, type and
class and were subsequently dropped.
This is the number of dropped queries due to
the reason explained with the
<span><strong class="command">clients-per-query</strong></span>
and
<span><strong class="command">max-clients-per-query</strong></span>
options
(see the description about
<a href="Bv9ARM.ch06.html#clients-per-query"><span><strong class="command">clients-per-query</strong></span></a>.)
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">dropped</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryFailure</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Other query failures.
This corresponds to the
<span><strong class="command">failure</strong></span> counter
of previous versions of
<acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9.
Note: this counter is provided mainly for
backward compatibility with the previous versions.
Normally a more fine-grained counters such as
<span><strong class="command">AuthQryRej</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">RecQryRej</strong></span>
that would also fall into this counter are provided,
and so this counter would not be of much
interest in practice.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">XfrReqDone</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Requested zone transfers completed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateReqFwd</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Update requests forwarded.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateRespFwd</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Update responses forwarded.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateFwdFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dynamic update forward failed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateDone</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dynamic updates completed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dynamic updates failed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">UpdateBadPrereq</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Dynamic updates rejected due to prerequisite failure.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2600857"></a>Zone Maintenance Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">NotifyOutv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 notifies sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">NotifyOutv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 notifies sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">NotifyInv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 notifies received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">NotifyInv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 notifies received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">NotifyRej</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Incoming notifies rejected.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SOAOutv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 SOA queries sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SOAOutv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 SOA queries sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">AXFRReqv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 AXFR requested.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">AXFRReqv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 AXFR requested.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">IXFRReqv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 IXFR requested.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">IXFRReqv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 IXFR requested.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">XfrSuccess</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Zone transfer requests succeeded.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">XfrFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Zone transfer requests failed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2601308"></a>Resolver Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>BIND8 Symbol</em></span>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Queryv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SFwdQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 queries sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Queryv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SFwdQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 queries sent.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Responsev4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RR</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 responses received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Responsev6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RR</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 responses received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">NXDOMAIN</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RNXD</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
NXDOMAIN received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SERVFAIL</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
SERVFAIL received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">FORMERR</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RFErr</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
FORMERR received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">OtherError</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RErr</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Other errors received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">EDNS0Fail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
EDNS(0) query failures.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Mismatch</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RDupR</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Mismatch responses received.
The DNS ID, response's source address,
and/or the response's source port does not
match what was expected.
(The port must be 53 or as defined by
the <span><strong class="command">port</strong></span> option.)
This may be an indication of a cache
poisoning attempt.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Truncated</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Truncated responses received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Lame</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">RLame</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Lame delegations received.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">Retry</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SDupQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Query retries performed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QueryAbort</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Queries aborted due to quota control.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QuerySockFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures in opening query sockets.
One common reason for such failures is a
failure of opening a new socket due to a
limitation on file descriptors.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QueryTimeout</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Query timeouts.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv4</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SSysQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 NS address fetches invoked.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv6</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">SSysQ</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 NS address fetches invoked.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv4Fail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv4 NS address fetch failed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">GlueFetchv6Fail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
IPv6 NS address fetch failed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ValAttempt</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
DNSSEC validation attempted.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ValOk</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
DNSSEC validation succeeded.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ValNegOk</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
DNSSEC validation on negative information succeeded.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">ValFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
DNSSEC validation failed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command">QryRTTnn</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"></strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Frequency table on round trip times (RTTs) of
queries.
Each <span><strong class="command">nn</strong></span> specifies the corresponding
frequency.
In the sequence of
<span><strong class="command">nn_1</strong></span>,
<span><strong class="command">nn_2</strong></span>,
...,
<span><strong class="command">nn_m</strong></span>,
the value of <span><strong class="command">nn_i</strong></span> is the
number of queries whose RTTs are between
<span><strong class="command">nn_(i-1)</strong></span> (inclusive) and
<span><strong class="command">nn_i</strong></span> (exclusive) milliseconds.
For the sake of convenience we define
<span><strong class="command">nn_0</strong></span> to be 0.
The last entry should be represented as
<span><strong class="command">nn_m+</strong></span>, which means the
number of queries whose RTTs are equal to or over
<span><strong class="command">nn_m</strong></span> milliseconds.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2602398"></a>Socket I/O Statistics Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Socket I/O statistics counters are defined per socket
types, which are
<span><strong class="command">UDP4</strong></span> (UDP/IPv4),
<span><strong class="command">UDP6</strong></span> (UDP/IPv6),
<span><strong class="command">TCP4</strong></span> (TCP/IPv4),
<span><strong class="command">TCP6</strong></span> (TCP/IPv6),
<span><strong class="command">Unix</strong></span> (Unix Domain), and
<span><strong class="command">FDwatch</strong></span> (sockets opened outside the
socket module).
In the following table <span><strong class="command"><TYPE></strong></span>
represents a socket type.
Not all counters are available for all socket types;
exceptions are noted in the description field.
</p>
<div class="informaltable"><table border="1">
<colgroup>
<col>
<col>
</colgroup>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Symbol</em></span>
</p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
<span class="emphasis"><em>Description</em></span>
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>Open</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Sockets opened successfully.
This counter is not applicable to the
<span><strong class="command">FDwatch</strong></span> type.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>OpenFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures of opening sockets.
This counter is not applicable to the
<span><strong class="command">FDwatch</strong></span> type.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>Close</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Sockets closed.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>BindFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures of binding sockets.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>ConnFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures of connecting sockets.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>Conn</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Connections established successfully.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>AcceptFail</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Failures of accepting incoming connection requests.
This counter is not applicable to the
<span><strong class="command">UDP</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">FDwatch</strong></span> types.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>Accept</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Incoming connections successfully accepted.
This counter is not applicable to the
<span><strong class="command">UDP</strong></span> and
<span><strong class="command">FDwatch</strong></span> types.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>SendErr</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Errors in socket send operations.
This counter corresponds
to <span><strong class="command">SErr</strong></span> counter of
<span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 8.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<p><span><strong class="command"><TYPE>RecvErr</strong></span></p>
</td>
<td>
<p>
Errors in socket receive operations.
This includes errors of send operations on a
connected UDP socket notified by an ICMP error
message.
</p>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="id2602840"></a>Compatibility with <span class="emphasis"><em>BIND</em></span> 8 Counters</h4></div></div></div>
<p>
Most statistics counters that were available
in <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 8 are also supported in
<span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 9 as shown in the above tables.
Here are notes about other counters that do not appear
in these tables.
</p>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">RFwdR,SFwdR</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
These counters are not supported
because <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 9 does not adopt
the notion of <span class="emphasis"><em>forwarding</em></span>
as <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 8 did.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">RAXFR</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This counter is accessible in the Incoming Queries section.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">RIQ</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This counter is accessible in the Incoming Requests section.
</p></dd>
<dt><span class="term"><span><strong class="command">ROpts</strong></span></span></dt>
<dd><p>
This counter is not supported
because <span><strong class="command">BIND</strong></span> 9 does not care
about IP options in the first place.
</p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="navfooter">
<hr>
<table width="100%" summary="Navigation footer">
<tr>
<td width="40%" align="left">
<a accesskey="p" href="Bv9ARM.ch05.html">Prev</a> </td>
<td width="20%" align="center"> </td>
<td width="40%" align="right"> <a accesskey="n" href="Bv9ARM.ch07.html">Next</a>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="40%" align="left" valign="top">Chapter 5. The <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Lightweight Resolver </td>
<td width="20%" align="center"><a accesskey="h" href="Bv9ARM.html">Home</a></td>
<td width="40%" align="right" valign="top"> Chapter 7. <acronym class="acronym">BIND</acronym> 9 Security Considerations</td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
</body>
</html>